Home

Manual Maipu Router MP2000 Series - User Manual

1. Click Apel certificate to apply certificate Apply certificate Selectable CA Username Password Length of 512 iv private key eae Selectable CA name of existing CA trust domain The user is required to input password if CA server belongs to Maipu certificate server Username name of certificate user Length of Private Key set length of private key Get the C4 root After successful application click 2ttificate hyperlink in table of certificate information to get certificate from certificate administrator Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 92 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 View Status Information On this interface the user can view information of existing policy and tunnel configuration including information of the first stage and the second stage of policy negotiation EA se eis M PREP Bee REES EHEC eSB ee ee a Bee ia a poli cyt r T policyO HRA EE ike policy policyO id 1 tunnel tunneld src address 1 1 1 0 255 253 239 0 dst address 2 2 2 0 255 255 255 0 protocol ip sre port any dst port any time range active Policy policyO Information of the first stage of IKE SA negotiation localaddr peeraddr peer identity negotiation state sa id Policy policyO Information of the second stage of IKE SA negotiation policy name policyO f src dst protocol src port dst port 192 168 16 0 24 192 168 17 0 24 ip any any total sa
2. HHEHEHEHEHHAHHEHEEEHE AEA HARAAREEE RAR R AHA RRR HARRAH HHEEHEHAHHAAHAFEHE AEA HARAAREEE RRR RRHAHR EERE RR RREHEE HHEHEHEEHHAAHEHEEEHEARAARAAEEEE RAR RRHRAHE ERE RRR RAE HEEE HHEEHHEHHHHHHEHEEE REA HAHA EHEHEAE RAH AAHAHE EEA RAHA HEEHE HHEEHHEHAHHAHHHEEEHE AEA HARAAREEE RA HRRAHRAHREHE RRR RRRAHEE HHEHEHHHHHHHEHEHEHEE RRA HAHAH EHEHEHE RAH AAA HE EAR ARH EHE HHEHEHHEHHHAHHEAEEHE AEA HRRAAREEE RR HRRAHAHR ERR RRR RREEEE HHEEHHEHAHAAHAEEEHE AEA HARAAREEE RRR HARRAH EER RRR RRAHEE HHEHEHHEHHHAAHHEEEHE AEA HRARAREEE RAHA RAHA ERR RRR RRA HEEE HHEHEHEEHHHAHHHEEEHE AREA RRA REEE RRA RARER ERR RR RRREHEE HHEEHEH OK Download monitor bin 239648 Bytes successed Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 228 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 erase old Monitor from flash write new Monitor to flaSN ccccccceeeeeeeececeeeeeeueuueesuueueesauuuusneauunns 239648 bytes written router It shows that upgrading monitor program succeeds Here you just need to restart the router You can use the show version command to judge whether monitor program is upgraded successfully Upgrade the bin Files of Application Program via sysupdate Commands Command format Sysupdate dest ipaddress filename ftp ftp username ftp password Commands Syntax Description dest ipaddress lp address of FTP server fielname FTP file name ftp username FTP user name ftp password FTP user password Command mode privilege
3. Cancel Validating it is used to check certificate cancellation strictly in certificate authentication each time or not Without valid CRL authentication is failed But such guarantee on security will degrade application Generally speaking certificate cancellation resulted from private key release occurs very seldom and private key release can be prevented effectively by accessing and controlling certificate user so the user is subjected to leave it disabled Period of validity Confirm whether to check period of validity in certificate authentication each time Since different system period will result in failed authentication because of check fault this option is always neglected With high security of certificate it is impossible to take long period of time to decode private key of certificate so it will not have great effect on security if the user neglects this option After configuring CA trust domain successfully the user can get CA root Get the C4 root certificate by clicking 22ttificate hyperlink in table of CA trust domain Windows Internet Explorer CAER RSM A 27 8 8 RBICARIER SH HR ae are mapoo 128 255 eH CARIE BEHET RECAREE xX oe gt CE74B4379F42C844EB54CC68455C097 ate C CN O maipu CN mapoo file C CN O maipu CN mapoo MEEI pse ik h 2006 05 18 08 04 30 soe br 2016 05 18 08 04 30 min MECA ER Bet shal a589a29eb09a8c1b12f770f431e678fe26a340f7 PEC Ate Heit ELAR MBER WATE AI
4. In unstable network state it may result in packet drop or voice packet sending low and fast or voice bouncing In such case the user has to set JitterBuffer parameters of DSP to eliminate bouncing by buffer There are two parameters unit ms One parameter is used to set max buffer time of buffer area and the other is used to define mode DSP will send the voice data to corresponding receiver or other play terminal via relevant interface only if buffer time equals to setting time Payload each coding voice packet payload is subject to a standard basically Based on this standard packet unit payload n indicates that current packet capacity equals to n unit Fill the blank with certain value to adjust voice packet flow in network The larger payload you set the fewer voice packets exist in network The standard unit is 1 by default and the user can modify it VAD Configure VAD function Disable disable VAD function SID mode send SID PT13 mode send PT13 only applicable to g711 code Note Disable VAD in faxing mode or it may affect fax Reverse Polarity Enable reverse polarity FXS port sends reverse polarity Signals to the peer terminal line after off hook by the called end Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 54 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Display Calling Number decide whether send fsk calling number signals to called phone via FXS access Enable direct outward dial Wh
5. Syntax Description ipv4 unicast Clear information of ipv4 unicast address cluster ipv4 multicast Clear information of ipv4 multicast address cluster address Specify the network IP address whose attenuation information is cleared address prefix length Specify the address prefix whose attenuation information is cleared clear ip bgp flap statistics command The command is used to clear the statistics information of the route flapping Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 211 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast multicast flap statistics address address prefix length Syntax ipv4 unicast ipv4 multicast address address prefix length clear ip bgp in command Description Clear information of ipv4 unicast address cluster Clear information of ipv4 multicast address cluster Specify the network IP address whose flapping Statistics information is cleared Specify the address prefix whose flapping Statistics information is cleared The command is used to perform the soft re configuration on the route entering the router If the local saves the original route received from the neighbor use the route to re calculate directly if the local does not save but the neighbor supports route update send the route update message to the neighbor clear ip bgp address as number peer group group name external Lipv4 unicast multicast vrf vrf_n
6. When using the detect NAT type button to detect NAT type manually ensure that the previous mapping on NAT is deleted Otherwise the detect result may be wrong If NAT type auto detect period is smaller than the timeout of NAT mapping on NAT the detect type may be wrong but do not affect the function of DUP packets traversing NAT Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 52 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Voice Port Configuration On this interface you can check or edit the numbers and port states configured on all voice ports Voice port configuration Voice port configuration Port State Phone number Configuration FXS 0 enable 401 Advanced FXS 1 enable 402 Advanced FXS 2 enable 403 Advanced FXS 3 enable 404 Advanced FXO O disabled out line Advanced Call route config gt gt Click to add phone number for a specified port Click Edit to modify phone number or click Delete to delete phone number Click Call route config to enter the call route configuration interface The interface for adding and editing port phone number is Configure local phone number on the port eir Jf cance Edit number in form of wildcard X X stands for any number single digit or multi digit e g edit FXO number as 9xxxxxxxx which indicates 9 digit number whose name started with 9 perform calling via FXO interface Please refer to POST dial up port page in call
7. ey Pine ANRE ARS SSIPHALE 128 255 32 10 insaeemc fea TA 0 HOH C Listening Set Maipu TFTP server Step 2 Make TFTP server in the listening state Click Listen on the tools bar to display following interface Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 227 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 cl MaiPu TFTP Server Client 126 255 32 10 J mprouter _mp2600_edition _ 4 oO x Me RCE 0 Eko AP EHI Fed lene rep wey ako EWH G eI mA cL Pe BO HEG AT a Listening Maipu TFTP server is in the listening state Step 3 Connect the network Connect the PC as TFTP server and router via Ethernet or via other modes to ensure that they can ping each other Step 4 Upgrade monitor program 1 Upgrade monitor program MP2000 sysupdate 128 255 32 10 monitor bin reload lt CR gt If the reload sub command is added the system prompts whether to restart the router at once and whether to save the configuration after the upgrade If the reload sub command is not added you can execute the reload command or power off to restart the router after the upgrade Here the router prompts Do you really update monitor bin yes no Input n lt CR gt to cancel the operation input y lt CR gt to perform the upgrade operation After entering y lt CR gt the router prompts the following information downloading Monitor 239648 Bytes
8. unicast RIP Routing Cost Offset Configuration In the network topology figure 4 5 in order to make the 20 1 1 0 24 routing cost learned by router B from router A increases 2 the configuration of router B is Command Description router B configure terminal To enter Global Configuration Mode router B config interface ethernet0 To enter the e0 interface router B config if ethernetO ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip address router B config ip access list standard 10 To configure the standard access list router B config std nacl permit 20 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 To configure the rule to permit 20 1 1 0 24 router B config router rip To enter the RIP Configuration Mode router B config rip network 10 0 0 0 To specify the network number run by RIP router B config rip version 2 To configure the RIP version router B config rip offset list 10 in 2 e0 To use the access list on the e0 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 143 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The configuration of Router A is the same as 4 2 3 1 Run show ip route rip on Router B the cost of 20 1 1 0 24 has increased 2 on the original basis R 20 1 1 0 24 120 4 via 10 1 1 1 00 00 06 etherneto RIP Route Redistribution Configuration In the network topology figure 4 6 configure static routing on Router A If Router B wants to learn these static routes users need to configure the redistribution of stati
9. Click Next to enter the following configuration interface or select Exit to return to the homepage Configuration Wizard of Qos Band width settings Band width settings Configure bandwidth management parameters Max output band width S600 Range 480 1000000000 Unit bits second 10000A The maximum bytes allowed of bursttransmission Bursttransmission bytes j in 1 60 second Range 1600 5000000 Unit byte The above bandwidth settings interface provides two configuration items Max output bandwidth It is the maximum output bandwidth of the interface The actual valid value is the multiple of 480 Therefore after configuration you can find that the actual valid value becomes the multiple of 480 smaller than the input value For example the input is 48001 and the value becomes 48000 after configuration The maximum output bandwidth should not be configured too small Otherwise the communication speed becomes too low which affects the normal use It is recommended that the maximum output bandwidth is no less than 524288bps Burst transmission bytes It is the burst transmitted bytes allowed within 1 60s The burst transmitted bytes should be larger than or equal to 1 480 of the maximum output bandwidth You can de select the Configure Bandwidth Management Parameters check box to cancel or not configure the bandwidth management items The configuration can be used only after enabling VoIP data first QoS Click Back to retu
10. Default status No authentication Configure the simple text password ip ospf ip address authentication key 0 7 password no ip ospf ip address authentication key 0 7 password Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 156 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Syntax Description lp address Can individually specify the plain text authentication password of the specified interface s address on OSPF interface 0 To configure the password which is not encrypted 7 To configure the password which is encrypted used for script running when enabling the password encryption service users should not configured the command manually password The password of the plain text authentication Default status the password is not configured Configure the key id and password of the MD5 authentication ip ospf ip address message digest key key id md5 0 7 password no ip ospf ip address message digest key key id md5 0 7 password Syntax Description ip address Can individually specify the id and password of the MD authentication of the specified address on OSPF interface key id To configure the key id of the MD5 authentication 0 To configure the password which is not encrypted 7 To configure the password which is encrypted used for script running when enabling the password encryption service users should not configured the command manually password The password of the MD5 authentication Default status the pass
11. E Range 60 1000000 Unit pps ICMP layer 3 i other layer 3 forward throughput Unit pps forward throughput Unit pps Range 60 1000000 Range 60 1000000 limit limit TCP layer 3 toupper Unit pps UDP layer 3 toupper a Unit pps throughput limit Range 60 1000000 throughput limit Range 60 1000000 ICMP layer 3 Other layer 3 Unit pps toupper throughput ia Unit pps toupper throughput fe Range 60 1000000 limit limit Range 60 1000000 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 108 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 sub Interface Configuration MP2000 104B adds the service configurations of sub interfaces For example to make the data flow with VLAN ID as 1 received by fastethernet0O 1 do as follows In the second step of the WAN configuration guide one WAN port and ten sub interfaces are listed by default the number of configured sub interfaces can be more than ten but considering we should not use s many sub interfaces so only ten sub interfaces are listed for users to configure Select fastethernetO 1 from the listed interfaces Internet AACE eS Rre e Eb ge A LAA Te SES Internet tetera cet SCREAM a iip fastethernet0 1 Wan fastethernetd fastethernet dQ fastethernet dU fastethernetO fastethernetU fastethernet dU fastethernet dQ fastethernetd fastethernet dU fastethernetd t Tr Bh Ooo ao oe o
12. Null Delay ring means disable Unit second string Range 0 15 Default 0 Delay dial 30 Unit tick Range 20 120 Type of dial eae g i 450 Hz x Hz Default 450Hz tone default 30 tone mp 5 Unit 20ms Range 4 100 DTMF loud Unit 20ms Default 5 Range 4 100 Default 5 DTMF silent Connection PEN Phone number O FXS port Support FXOFXS linkage The state change of fxs port will affect that of fxo port if a directly connected number is config to fxs port FXO port plarout Bound number or voice port Transfer mode Configuration 3 E Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 55 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Delay Dial String start with umbers and end with commas each commas represents signal sending interval of one character When the user sets delay dial string as 17909 for example 1790902888888888 The gateway sends first 17909 to PSTN and then sends 02888888888 a while later It is used to transfer second dial to direct dial Delay ring set delay ring time Range 0 15 unit second default O s Delay Dial Tone set time of wait dial tone Range 20 120 ticks default 30 Type of Dial Tone configure type of dial tone The options are 450HZ default 600HZ and 500HZ DTMF silent set interval of dial time Range 4 100 unit 20 ms default 5 ms DTMF Loud set dtmf lounds Range 4 100 unit 20 ms default 5 ms Connection plar s
13. Proprietary Information Page 59 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Perform VOIP configuration by click Add in VOIP Config oe Call route config VOIP dial peer configuration Index 5 Range 1 100 Route phone number matching rule can configure completely phone Phone number number matching or prefix phone number matching Use x present for a digit use present for any digits of any length e g 028x present for any number that match prefix 028 Feer gateway iw Target Route priority Priority decreases as the digit increase Encode The preferred voice codec when making a IP call over this dial peer Default g729 Called Apply index of transform rule to called number Calling Apply number transform to calling number Fax Configure the fax capability of the dial peer Backup d Index series number of this dial rule Phone Number configure the called number in peer terminal Target peer gateway configure IP address of peer gateway address of called gateway gatekeeper target address is that of gateway SIP server target address is that of SIP server Route Priority configuration priority 1 20 Priority decreases as the digit increase Default 10 The gateway is disabled when digit is 20 Encode configure voice encode type Called Apply number transform rule to called number Calling Apply number transform rule to calling number Fax configure the fax funct
14. SY Stell Aa CGR a TR 110 Basic Information Configuration lt iieciansies wianntarsacunee wanceaesonuxtovestecnnaansncedcepaeintenevectensennteyaneeartin 110 Admin Tar eS EN tase ctsapa ante enema E susdieagsupnacuae E E 111 Navigation from MasterPlan to WEB Network Management s sssssssssssssrsrrnrsrsrrnrnnsrnrnsrsrerenns 112 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 5 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 User Name amp Password Management of Web NMS in Masterplan cccccscsseseesseeeseeseeseeeeenees 113 Configuration File Management s ssssssssansssnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnsasnnsnnnnasnnsnenrannnsnsnrunnnnnsnnnnennnnnnnnnnn 115 Log Tea eSNG satewectsea ecicesstaetcage suet EE EE A EEE EEEE E 115 SNMP Parameter Configuration s sssssssssssssrrrrnrsrrnrsrerrnnnrnrnnenrnnnnonrntnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne nnna 116 Slices gilsUecd a ee re 117 Recs gt Ute a en E E ee ee ae 117 Shell Configuration Guide cccccccsescscsesesesesenenenenensnensnsnseseeseesessesesessesees LLOQ conng re ede Oe ato g ee er 119 RIP Dynami Routing R e aiic 0 cede ee ee a 121 RIP Bask CONAN NGS essre EE cents tunis uacoaleectnareaimiansnercsbadendiatac ues 122 Description of Related Commands for Configuring RIP sssssssssssssssssnsssnsrrnrnrersnrnrnnsrenrnrerenenne 123 Examples Or COMMUNN RIP rendei oE E E E E 136 Monitoring and Debugging of RIP sciiencntsicautotecaeeseudoasasudqwewcedewsavacacandcentacessedeceus
15. no ip ospf ip addr database filter all out Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 167 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Syntax Description lp address Can individually specify to prevent the flooding of LSA on an address of OSPF interface Default status not configured do not prevent Control OSPF Database Overflow In order to run the OSPF protocol correctly each OSPF router in the area has to maintain a consistent link state database When a router cannot save a big database because of the limited resources the problem of database overflow may occur For the database overflow which can be predicted it can be avoided by configuring Stub or NSSA area For the database overflow which cannot be predicted it needs to be processed properly The command overflow database This command configures the related parameters for controlling the overflow of the database overflow database external ospfExtLsdbLimit ospfExitOverflowInterval max lsa num hard soft no overflow database external ospfExtLsdbLimit ospfExitOverflowInterval Syntax Description To configure the maximum number of the permitted external ospfExtLsdbLimit LSAs the range is 0 4294967294 The default value is 0 When the amount of the external LSA exceeds the value then in the database overflow status To configure the time interval for trying to exit from the database overflow status the range is 0 65535 The default value
16. no maximum paths number eibgp number ibgp number unequal cost number Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 208 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Syntax Description number The number of EBGP routes that allow load balance ibgp number Perform load balance between IBGP routes eibgp number Perform load balance between EBGP and IBGP routes ibgp unequal cost number Perform load balance between IBGP routes Default status By default the BGP does not perform any load balance redistribute command The command is used to re distribute the route information of other routing protocols in BGP The no form of the command is used to cancel re distributing the route information of other protocols redistribute connected ospf as number rip static route map map name no ee connected ospf as number rip static route map map name Syntax Description as number Re distribute the autonomous system number or process number of route protocol map name The name of the route mapping Default status 4443 By default it is not enabled distance bgp command The command is used to configure the management distance between external BGP and the internal BGP and the management distance of the route received from a neighbor The no form of the command is used to recover the management distance between external BGP and the internal BGP distance bgp external distance internal dist
17. rossana O i RouterC config rip exit o RouterC config router bgp 200 RouterC config bgp neighbor 194 1 1 2 remote as 200 Specify AS number of BGP neighbor RouterC config bgp neighbor 193 1 1 1 route reflector Configure BGP neighbor as the client of the client route reflector RouterC config bgp neighbor 194 1 1 2 route reflector Configure BGP neighbor as the client of the client route reflector Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 218 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 RouterD configuration RouterD configure terminal Enter the Global Configuration Mode RouterD config if seriall 0 encapsulation hdlc Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC RouterD config if seriall1 0 ip address ee 255 255 255 0 RouterD config if seriall 0 clock rate 9600 RouterD config if seriall 0 exit RouterD config router rip RouterD config rip network 194 1 1 0 SF RouterD config rip version 2 re RouterD config rip exit RouterD config router bgp 200 Enter BGP Configuration Mode RouterD config bgp neighbor 194 1 1 1 remote as 200 Specify AS number of BGP neighbor Note The above explains the dynamic routing protocol BGP About the configuration mode of the physical layer and link layer refer to related sections Configuring RIP routing protocol on Router B Router C and Router D is to ensure that the routers in the same autonomous system can access each other Example 3 Configure BGP
18. the user can choose one tunnel as master tunnel or the tunnel in Apply to tunnel is selected as master tunnel by default Click Advance to configure IPSEC proposition adopted by policy for this tunnel The configuration of IPsec proposition is similar to that of IKE proposition If the user wants to alter position of some policy he can put some tunnel to another tunnel s front or back Policy settings Policy information ono KES Use Tunnel Policy Destination Source Destination Forward Refuse 7 Protocol Local address IPsec to be Edit Dek name address port port policy proposal used policy indows Internet Explorer Transmit 2 j hre you sure to put policy policyl to policy policy s front Set pa OK Cancel a ok Forward Refuse Policy it refers to application mode of policy Forward means that all messages that conform to such policy will be forwarded Refuse means that all messages that conform to such policy will be refused for forwarding Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 90 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Certificate Configuration On this interface the user can view the information of existing CA trust domain CA root certificate and Local certificate System shows the user configuration certificate table if there is no CA trust domain certificate Settings CA information Period of CA Server Server Cancel ae CRL auto update Get
19. 145 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 router A ghi04 1 1 24 VRE 8 router B The configuration of rotuer A router A configure terminal router A config ip vrf a router A config vrf rd 1 1 router A config vrf exit To return to Global Configuration Mode router A config ip vrf b To configure VRF b router A config vrf rd 2 2 To configure RD router A config vrf exit To return to Global Configuration Mode router A config if gigaethernetO ip vrf forwarding b router A config if gigaethernetO ip address 20 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 router A config if gigaethernetO interface gigaethernetl router A config if gigaethernetO ip vrf forwarding a router A config if gigaethernet1 ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 router A config if gigaethernet1 exit To return to Global Configuration Mode router A config router rip To enter the RIP Configuration Mode router A config rip address family ipv4 vrf a To enable VRF a instance of RIP router A config rip af network 10 0 0 0 To specify the network number run by RIP router A config rip af version 2 To configure the RIP version router A config rip af exit To return to the RIP Configuration Mode router A config interface gigaethernetO To enter the gO interface Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 146 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 router A config rip address family ipv4 vrf b router
20. 1D 55 0 0 1 the designated Router 55 0 0 1 Interface Address 129 255 19 160 the IP address of the designated router s interface 129 255 19 160 Backup Designated Router ID 222 222 222 222 backup the designated router 222 222 222 222 Interface Address 129 255 19 90 backup the IP address of the designated router s interface 129 255 19 90 Timer intervals configured Hello 10 hello time interval 10 seconds Dead 40 dead time interval 40 seconds Wait 40 Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00 00 01 Neighbor Count is 1 Adjacent neighbor count is 1 Crypt Sequence Number is 0 Hello received 234 sent 236 DD received 8 sent 13 LS Req received 2 sent 2 LS Upd received 13 sent 10 LS Ack received 7 sent 10 Discarded 0 Show ip ospf neighbor Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface display ospf neighbor 55 0 0 1 1 Full DR 00 00 36 129 255 19 160 gigaethernetO Configure BGP Dynamic Route BGP Border Gateway Protocol is distance vector based path vector routing protocol This protocol is used to transfer the route information between autonomous systems IGP can be used to determine the route in the autonomous system Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 182 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 BGP uses TCP as the transfer protocol port number 179 This not only ensures the reliability of all transmission but reduces the resource occupied by the protocols BGP is a factual standard
21. Backup gatekeeper Notice If you want to use multicast GRQ to find a gakekeeper please enter instead of IP or domain name If you do not want to designate a gatekeeper domain which this gateway try to register please fill in the gatekeeper domain field The range of port is 1 65535 means multicast GK ID Port x Register to gatekeeper Registration failed Advanced configuration eee ss Binding interface Define this interface as H323 protocol interface of MP2000 104B Generally speaking dialerO interface should be adopted when connecting to internet via PPPoE protocol When start VPN voice data protection function select the interface according to source address of data streams in VPN configuration Mandatory configuration Adopt this interface reasonably according to VOIP application environment even without gatekeeper H323 ID It is used by the gatekeeper to identify the gateway interface optional Password The authentication password between gateway and gatekeeper Fill in this option according to username and password authorized by gatekeeper when authentication between gateway and gatekeeper is necessary Optional Keep alive time Interval of sending keep alive packets from gateway to gatekeeper Range lt 30 3600 gt seconds Default 60s Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 46 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Number Transition Rule During gatekeeper calli
22. CFB number as 123456 in Call Divert by dialing 40 123456 System will inform the user of successful operation with tone beep beep beep or failed operation with busy tone Provided that user has right to use Call Divert the user can inquire whether 123456 has been set as CFB number in Call Divert by dialing 40 123456 If the number has been set before system will inform the user with tone beep beep beep if the number does not conform to the original one or has not been set the user will hear busy tone Provided that user has right to use Call Divert the user can cancel CFB in Call Divert by dialing 40 System will inform the user of successful operation with tone beep beep beep or failed operation with busy tone Note For divert refers to several diverts in complicated network environment the fault will displayed by busy tone directly in common divert Brief introduction of Call Waiting Call Waiting informs the user of new call for user to accept reject or leave it unanswered For example user A is communicating with user B that has registered call waiting service At the same time user C tries to call busy B The Router will send user B a prompt namely beep beep beep tone which indicates a call waiting User B can choose to accept reject or leave it unanswered If user B does not make choice during call waiting the user C hears ringing back
23. Configure the BGP peer entity or peer entity group as the client of the route reflector Configuration Mode config config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode does not include IPv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp af Page 183 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 client neighbor neighbor address group name_ send community both extended standard neighbor neighbor address group name timers keepalive interval holdtime interval connect connect interva neighbor neighbor address group name ebgp multihop ttl neighbor neighbor address group name _ update source interface ip address neighbor neighbor address group name distribute list access list name in out neighbor neighbor address group name filter list aspath list name in out neighbor neighbor address group name prefix list prefix list name in out neighbor neighbor address version 4 neighbor neighbor address group name capability dynamic orf prefix list both
24. Default status By default do not send the community attributes neighbor timers command The command is used to configure the timer of BGP peer entity or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to recover the default value neighbor neighbor address group name timers keepalive interval holdtime interval connect connect interva no neighbor neighbor address group name timers connect connect interva Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group keepalive interval Specify the keepalive interval with the neighbor holdtime interval Specify the holdtime interval with the neighbor Specify the interval of initiating the connection request to the neighbor Default status By default the keepalive interval is 60s and the holdtime interval is 180s connect interva neighbor ebgp multihop command The command is used to Set IP TTL of the packets between EBGP peer entities or peer entity groups It is used to allow EBGP peer entities or peer entity groups on the network that are not connected directly to be connected If ttl is not specified it is configured as the maximum value 255 The no form of the command is used to cancel the existing xonfiguration neighbor neighbor address group name ebgp multithop ttl no neighbor neighbor address group name ebgp multihop ttl Syntax neighbor address group name ttl neighb
25. Fax 86 28 85148948 85148139 URL http www maipu com Mail overseas maipu com All other products or services mentioned herein may be registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of their respective manufacturers companies or organizations Document History Date Revision No Description 11 07 2008 R1 0 The MP2000 104B AC User Manual V1 0 provides all information about the router designed and developed by Maipu Communication Technology Co Ltd Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 2 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Maipu Feedback Form Your opinion helps us improve the quality of our product documentation and offer better services Please fax your comments and suggestions to 86 28 85148948 85148139 or email to overseas maipu com Document Title MP2000 104B AC USER MANUAL VERSION 1 0 Product Document 2 0 Version Revision Number Evaluate this Presentation document Introductions procedures illustrations completeness arrangement appearance C Good O Fair O Average O Poor Accessibility Contents index headings numbering C Good UI Fair O Average O Poor Editorial Language vocabulary readability clarity technical accuracy content C Good O Fair O Average O Poor Your Please check suggestions to improve this document suggestions to improve introduction O Make more concise improve the CI Improve Contents C Add more step by step procedures tutor
26. Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 189 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Default status BGP is disabled Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 190 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 neighbor remote as command The command is used to specify the autonomous system number of the BGP peer entity or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to delete the autonomous system number of the peer entity or peer entity group neighbor neighbor address group name remote as as number no neighbor neighbor address group name remote as as number Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group as number The autonomous system number of the peer entity or peer entity group neighbor peer group command The command is used to create a peer entity group The no form of the command is used to delete the created peer entity group neighbor group name peer group no neighbor group name peer group Syntax Description group name The name of the peer entity group Default status None neighbor peer group command The command is used to add a peer entity to a peer entity group The no form of the command is used to delete the peer entity in the peer entity group neighbor neighbor address peer group group name no neighbor neighbor address peer group group name Syntax Description nei
27. Monitor Version 1 17 5 vor config IOS Version 9 2 9 VPN Contig IOS Image File rp10 iv 8 2 2 bin Route Config Compiled Time of IOS 2008 4 10 09 05 27 Seaton Mennounect WEB System Version 1 1 build 48 Save Configuration Compiled Time of WEB System 2008 4 8 17 29 08 Running Mode Router v Perform configuration according to figures below LAN Configuration Enter LAN interface configuration from navigation menu Generally speaking internal IP address is the same as LAN Router address The system default is 192 168 0 1 and subnet mask default is 255 255 255 0 In this page the user can modify intranet IP address subnet mask and intranet MAC address of MP2000 104B Lan interface configuration IP address 192 168 0 1 e g 192 168 0 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 e g 255 255 255 0 MAC address 00 01 TA 06 71 A8 e g 00 01 7A 4F 74 D2 Tip If not entered then use default DHCP Service Configuration In this page the user can choose to start DHCP service or not via DHCP service configuration When DHCP service is started the system will calculate assignable address range for LAN The user can modify start address and end address personally Press Apply button to start DHCP server finally Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 18 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 QIDHCP Service Config DHCP Service Config IP address Subnet mask Enable DHCP
28. Proprietary Information Page 135 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The command ip summary address rip This command configures the address summarization of RIP version 2 on the interface The address summarization is invalid for RIP version 1 The no format of the command can be used to cancel the address summarization of RIP version 2 on the interface ip Ssummary address rip A B C D n no ip summary address rip A B C D n Syntax Description A B C D n To configure the summary route of the address summarization on the interface of RIP version2 Default status no address summarization Command mode Interface Configuration Mode Note In RIP there are two kinds of route summaries route auto summary and the address summary configured on the interface For RIP version 1 only the route auto summary is valid For RIP version 2 when the route auto summary and the address Summary on the interface exist at the same time the route auto summary is performed at first when the route auto summary cannot be performed super net then the address summary on the interface is enabled Examples of Configuring RIP RIP Enabling Configuration 0 20 1 1 1 24 router A router B Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 136 of 257 Illustration MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The network topology figure the g1 of Router A connects with the e0 of Router B their addresses are
29. RIP administration distance on Router B Command router B configure terminal router B config interface ethernetO router B config if ethernetO ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 router B config router rip router B config rip network 10 0 0 0 router B config rip version 2 router B config rip distance 100 Run the command show ip route rip on Router B Description To enter Global Configuration Mode To enter the e0 interface To configure the ip address To enter the RIP Configuration Mode Same as above To configure the RIP version To adjust the administration distance of RIP routes as 100 R 20 1 1 0 24 100 2 via 10 1 1 1 00 00 06 ethernetO RIP Route Filtering Configuration In the network topology figure 4 5 the configuration of Router A is the same as 4 2 3 1 Filter the route 20 1 1 0 24 on Router B Command router B configure terminal router B config interface ethernetO router B config if ethernetO ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 router B config ip access list standard 10 router B config std nacl deny 20 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 router B config std nacl permit any router B config router rip Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Description To enter Global Configuration Mode To enter the e0 interface To configure the ip address To configure the standard access list To configure the rule to deny 20 1 1 0 24 To configure the rule to permit other routes To
30. address peer_group name weight num no neighbor neighbor address peer_group name weight Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity peer_group name The name of the peer entity group num The default weight The value range is 0 65535 neighbor remove private AS command The command is used to configure removing the private AS number from the AS_ PATH attributes of BGP route before releasing BGP route to BGP peer entity or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 199 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 neighbor neighbor address peer_group name remove private AS no neighbor neighbor address peer_group name remove private AS Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity peer_group name The name of the peer entity group neighbor default originate command The command is used to send the default route to the BGP peer entity or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address peer _group name default originate route map map name no neighbor neighbor address peer_group name default originate route map map name Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity peer_group name The name of the peer entity group map name The name of the route map neighbor allow
31. address address prefix length clear ip bgp address as number peer group group name external ipv4 unicast multicast vrf vrf_name soft in clear ip bgp address as number peer group group name external ipv4 unicast multicast vrf vrf_name soft out clear ip bgp address as number peer group group name external ipv4 unicast multicast vrf vrf_name soft clear ip bgp address as number peer group group name external ipv4 unicast multicast in prefix filter show ip bgp ipv4 unicast multicast address address prefix length longer Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Re distribute the route information of other routing protocols in BGP Configure the management distance of BGP route Note The command distance administrative distance network number network mask acl name can be used only in config BGP Configuration Mode Configure the aggregation route information sent by BGP Configure the sending interval of BGP global keepalive and holdtime timer time View the BGP protocol configuration of the local Re set BGP neighbor Clear the route flapping attenuation information and the suppression for the suppressed route Clear the statistics information of route flapping Perform the soft re configuration on the route entering the router Note If the local saves the original route received from
32. and sa group is 0 View information of specified tunnel Choose tunnel from the select box to view its configuration Tunnel tunnelO Information of configuration Crypto tunnel tunnelO id 1 type template policy name policyO peer any local interface dialerO address 128 255 18 5 peer identity 129 255 80 203 local identity vpna company com authentication preshare mode aggressive sec level basic ike proposal null ipsec proposal null dpd delay 30 timeout 90 virtual domain id off nat traversal keepalive time 20 seconds idle time off share limit off support DHCP over IPsec off Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 93 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The user can choose to view configuration information of some policy or tunnel Once one policy is selected the information of the first stage and the second stage of negotiation will be displayed The information is refreshing automatically and constantly For failed negotiation system marks key information in bright color for user to view and modify Configuration Examples Based on integrated VPN function MP2000 104B Router can extend original data private network of user extending business MIS and voice business to extension grassroots units The typical examples are shown below Business Center SE a 1 0 0 1 YPN SERVER 129 255 40 203 Internet ADS hoe 192 168 16 1 T
33. and supports two clients Router B and Router C Router A is located in AS 100 while Router B Router C and Router D is located in AS 200 RouterA configuration Command RouterA configure terminal RouterA config interface loopbackO RouterA config if loopback0O ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterA config if loopback0 interface s1 0 RouterA config if seriall 0 encapsulation hdlc RouterA config if seriall 0 ip address 255 255 255 0 RouterA config if serial1 0 exit RouterA config router bgp 100 192 1 1 1 RouterA config bgp neighbor 192 1 1 2 remote as 200 RouterA config bgp network 1 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 RouterA config bgp exit RouterB configuration Command RouterB configure terminal RouterB config interface loopback0O RouterB config if loopback0 ip address 255 255 255 255 RouterB config if loopback0 interface s1 0 RouterB config if seriall 0 encapsulation hdlc RouterB config if seriall 0 ip address 255 255 255 0 RouterB config if seriall 0 clock rate 9600 RouterB config if seriall 0 interface s2 0 RouterB config if serial2 0 encapsulation hdlc RouterB config if serial2 0 ip address 255 255 255 0 RouterB config if serial2 0 clock rate 9600 RouterB config if serial2 0 exit RouterB config router rip RouterB config rip network 193 1 1 0 RouterB config rip version 2 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information 2220 192 1 1 2 193 1 1 1 Descript
34. blanks with parameters of IP address subnet mask default gateway and DNS server The following interface provides the fixed address line configurations of WAN port that is fastethernetO and its ten sub interfaces Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN Fixed Address Line Please enter the IP address got from the ISP Interface Wan IP address 128 255 16 91 The IP addrees it is usually apprized by the line provider e g 202 10 68 69 Subnet 256 255 252 0 The subnet mask itis usually apprized by the line provider e g 255 255 255 0 The default Gateway 128 265 19 264 Configure the IP address of the default gateway of the Static Address Line here This parameter is usually apprized by the line provider e g 202 10 68 60 Preferred DNS server 10 0 0 10 The preferred DNS address Alternate DNS server 10 0 0 11 The backup DNS address Gateway checking S000 seconds Range is 0 32767 Default is interval 10s Line PRI High default Low For PPPoE Dial up Line fill in the blanks with account and password Contact ISP to get account and password Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 20 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN PPPoE Dial up Line Please enter your account and password Username admin Password d If Ethernet Dynamic Address Line is selected the device automatically sends DHCP packets to search DHC
35. config rip version 2 To configure the RIP version Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 140 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Run the command show ip route rip Router B we can see routes of the load blance R 20 1 1 0 24 100 2 via 10 1 1 1 00 00 06 ethernetO 100 2 via 10 1 1 3 00 00 06 ethernetO If the RIP load balance function needs to be disabled users need to configure the command maximum paths on Router B Command Description router B configure terminal To enter Global Configuration Mode router B config interface ethernet0 To enter the e0 interface router B config if ethernetO ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip address router B config router rip To enter the RIP Configuration Mode router B config rip network 10 0 0 0 Same as above router B config rip version 2 To configure the RIP version router B config rip maximum paths 1 To make RIP only use one path and disable the load balance Run the command show ip route rip on Router B there is only one route message RIP Passive Interface Configuration In the network topology figure 4 9 configure the gl interface on the Router A as the passive interface Command Description router A configure terminal To enter Global Configuration Mode router A config interface gigaethernetO To enter the gO interface router A config if gigaethernetO ip address 20 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip addr
36. configuration status In route mode Q switch Port Config Port status Rate Storm Port Connected Status Duplex Mbps control Disconnected Enable Full duplex 100 Lowest Auto Auto Disconnected Enable z n 5 pi Lowest negotiate negotiate Disconnected Enable aai A Lowest negotiate negotiate Disconnected Enable Full duplex 100 Lowest Port The device port in switch mode such as LANO Connected Connected indicates that port is in normal running state Disconnected indicates that port is not in normal running state Not in normal running state refers to temporary abnormality fail to connect to port or there is something wrong with line Once all requirements are met successful connection and no fault the state is Connected With constant refresh function the system displays Disconnected when the user plugs off lines Contrarily Connected is displayed when lines are plugged in normal state after troubleshooting Status Enable refers to application of corresponding port Disable refers to unused status of port It is enabled by default Priority Range 0 7 default 0 PVID VLAN number of certain VLAN port It is 1 by default Duplex Duplex status of port can be auto negotiate full duplex or half duplex It is auto negotiate by default Rate Mbps port rate It can be 10 100 or auto negotiate It is auto negotiate by default Storm Control Suppression function of po
37. configure C Disable DSP input 0 Unit db Range 10 10 DSP output 0 Unit db Range 10 10 volume Default 0 volume Default 0 Max Min 35 JitterBuffer Unit ms Range 0 300 eee Unit ms Range 0 255 Default 15 Def 35 elias efault 150 efault 35 Disable ha Default disable Reverse polarity Display the calling number Payload 2 Range 1 5 Default 2 VAD Delay dial Start with numbers and o end with commas for example 028 Null Delay ring means disable Unit second string Range 0 15 Default 0 Delay dial Unit tick Range 20 120 Type of dial gais 450 Hz Default 450Hz tone default 30 tone 450 a 5 t ae 5 k DTMF silent Unit 20ms Range 4 100 DTMF loud Unit 20ms Default 5 Range 4 100 Default 5 Connection Phone number O FXS port plar Support FXOFXS linkage The state change of fxs port will affect that of fxo port if a directly connected number is config to fxs port m Ja Refresh Jig Back FXO port plarout Bound number or voice port Transfer mode Configuration 02885148888 nottrans 1 0 nottrans Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 251 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Tick the Disable check box to enable FXO port Pay attention to the Connection plar option on this interface It refers to corresponding called telephone number or FXS port of MP2000 104B router when PNST is dialing FXO por
38. contents input by the user are displayed repeatedly which affects the normal use of the command editing function of shell system Input the IP address of the router and set up telnet connection with the router The host name is set as the IP address of the router 128 255 255 1 The port is set as Telnet 23 Terminal type is set as ANSI ETE HLH CH 128 255 255 1 am I CE telnet Selma T ms Connect window M The other operations are the same as the configuration via console interface Configure via WAN fic PC AC F A H at C WAN gt eum WAN w fang Configure the router via WAN Connect the PC to the remote router via the local router Run the Telnet client application program on the local PC The following steps are the same as those of the configuration via LAN When configuring router via Telnet do not change the IP address of the WAN interface casually When other parameters are sure to be configured correctly modify it again if necessary After modifying the IP address Telnet may be disconnected and you need to input new IP address to reconnect it Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 120 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 When the user logs in to Maipu router via PC such as WIN2000 do as follows First input user name and password to enter WIN2000 system With the command prompt of WIN2000 system run telnet client program to log in to
39. dust Requirement Dust threats operating safety of MP2000 104B Router It causes static absorption to result in unsound contact of metal connector or metal joint In low humidity indoor environment especially it is easier to cause static absorption which may shorten equipment service life and result in communication fault Anti static Requirement MP2000 104B has attached great importance to anti static via various measures but the circuit and the equipment may still be damaged when Static is beyond tolerance In MP2000 104B Router communication network electrostatic induction mainly originates from outdoor high pressure transmission line or external electric fields such as thunderbolt internal systems such as indoor environment flooring equipment frame To eliminate static damages we Should ensure good grounding of equipment and floor indoor dust proofing proper temperature and humidity wearing anti static wrist strap in circuit board operation Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 11 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Anti interference Requirement For any interference source from equipment or application externally or internally it has influence on equipment in manner of capacitive coupling conduction inductance coupled conduction electromagnetic radiation conduction common impedance conduction including grounding system and lead conduction power supply line signal line and output line
40. flow limit in the above figure lists the flow limit configuration information of a specified PC IP Address The IP address of the host to be configured with flow limit Sending Flow Limit sending flow limit of single PC Receiving Flow Limit receiving flow limit of single PC Note Single PC receiving flow limit and Single PC sending flow limit are configured globally They are for all PCs connected to the device If the single PC flow is not configured for a specified PC use the global configuration by default Otherwise adopt the specified configuration first Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 39 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 LAN Configuration LAN Interface Configuration The section explains IP address configuration of intranet interface Generally speaking IP address of intranet should be the gateway address of LAN The default value is 192 168 0 1 On this interface you can check configured IP address mask and MAC address of intranet interface an interface configuration IP address a e g 192 168 0 1 Subnet mask e fe g 255 255 255 0 MAC address 00 0l T 06 Fi 46 e g 00 01 7A 4F 74 D2 Tip If not entered then use default IP Address The IP address of intranet interface it is the gateway address of LAN The default value is 192 168 0 1 You can modify it according to your requirement Then the user can log in only with new IP addr
41. form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address peer_group name enforce multihop no neighbor neighbor address peer_group name enforce multihop Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity peer_group name The name of the peer entity group neighbor override capability command The command is used to configure the BGP connection between the local and BGP peer entity or peer entity group neglects the capability negotiation result The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address peer_group name override capability no neighbor neighbor address peer _group name override capability Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity peer_group name The name of the peer entity group neighbor passive command The command is used to configure the local not to initiate the TCP connection of BGP neighbor to BGP peer entity or peer entity group actively The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address peer_group name passive no neighbor neighbor address peer_group name passive Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity peer_group name The name of the peer entity group neighbor strict capability match command The command is used to configure the BGP connection between the local and the BGP peer entity or peer entity
42. from BGP per entity or peer entity group Configure the default weight of the peer entity or peer entity group Configure removing the private AS number from the AS_PATH attributes of BGP route before releasing BGP route to BGP peer entity or peer entity group Configure sending default route to the BGP peer entity or peer entity group Configure allowing to receive BGP route information with local AS number in AS_PATH attributes from BGP peer entity or peer entity group config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp af Page 185 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 neighbor peer_group name unchanged hop neighbor peer_group name established neighbor peer_group name capability negotiate neighbor peer_group name multihop neighbor peer_group name capability neighbor peer_g
43. if the value is exceeded The value range is 1 100 Default status no restriction of upper limit number and warning number Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode The command neighbor This command configures the neighbor router which notifies the routing information in the form of unicast The no format of the command can be used to cancel a neighbor router which notifies the routing information in the form of unicast neighbor ip address no neighbor ip address Syntax Description lp address To configure the IP address of the neighbor routers s notifying the routing information in the form of unicast direct connect interface Default status no neighbor router Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 127 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Note Notifying the routing information to neighbor only processes on ther interface covered by RIP and passive interface cannot prevent the sending of this kind of packets The command network This command configures the direct interconnection networks or interfaces covered by RIP Covering an interface is equivalent to covering all direct interconnection networks on the interface The no format of the command can be used to cancel the direct interconnection networks or interfaces covered by RIP network network number interface no network network number interface Syntax Description net
44. in batch to display interface of number transform configuration Transform rule Range 1 100 Input transform rule obeying one of the following format 130 139 20 139 Edit relevant configuration options according to suggestive range and finish it by clicking Apply Then the new configure rules are added to list The user can cancel the new transform rules by clicking Cancel or delete the wrong configuration rules directly by clicking Delete For example number transform and call router are configured as the figure shown below Number Transform Configuration Number transform list index Content of transform rule Configure Change the numbers begining with 9 to numbers 1 9 028 ae F benginning with 028 Delete t x Call Route Configuration OIP Config POTS Config Index Phone number Target PRI Encode Called Calling Fax Backup Config 2 912345 GW 128 255 17 222 10 g729 1 1 x It means the call route with dialing end as 2 When the caller number or called number begins with 9 replace the first number 9 by 028 If caller number is 945678 and called number is 912345 they are transformed to 02845678 and 02812345 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 58 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Call Route Configuration On this interface the user can edit dial route configuration Es 2 Call route config OIP Config POTS Config Index P
45. in order to avoid the fragment the sizes of the packets are all restricted to be smaller than the MTU value of the interface Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 158 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 ip ospf mtu mtu value no ip ospf mtu mtu value Syntax Description mtu value The maximum transmission unit of the interface the range is 576 65535 Default status not configured adopt the default value The command ip ospf mtu ignore This command ignores the MTU value during the inter communication of DD packets ip ospf ip address mtu ignore no ip ospf ip address mtu ignore Syntax Description ip address Can individually specify that an address on the OSPF interface to ignore the MTU value when DD packets are inter communicating Default status by default the MTU value needs to be compared when DD packets are inter communicating The command ip ospf network This command configures the network type of the ospf interface By default the network type of OSPF is determined by the network type of the physical interface ip ospf network lt broadcast non broadcast point to point point to multipoint non broadcast no ip ospf network Syntax Description broadcast Broadcast network non broadcast Non broadcast network NBMA point to point Point to point network point to multipoint Point to multipoint network point to multipoint non broadcast Point to multipoint non broadcast net
46. in the route table regexp_str Regular expressions route map Display information about routes filtered by route map in the route table map_name The name of the route map to be matched show ip bgp paths command The command is used to display summary information of AS PATH attributes of the BGP route show ip bgp paths show ip bgp attribute info command The command is used to display summary information of BGP route attributes show ip bgp attribute info show ip bgp community info command The command is used to display summary information of the BGP route community attributes show ip bgp community info show ip bgp scan command The command is used to display next hop address reachability and the related information of the BGP route information Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 224 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Show ip bgp scan show ip bgp vrf command The command is used to display vrf information in the BGP show ip bgp vrf vrf name Syntax Description vrf_name Specify the vrf name to be displayed show ip bgp neighbor command The command is used to display neighbor information show ip bgp ipv4 unicast multicast neighbor address advertised routes received prefix filter received routes routes Syntax Description ipv4 unicast Specify ipv4 unicast address cluster which does not affect the later commands ipv4 multicast Specify ipv4 multicast addr
47. interface Input the related configuration information and click Apply to add a DDNS instance successfully Add DDNS instance 3322 0rg Instance Username Password Domain to if multiple separated with comma e g activate mysite 3322 org Server to www 3322 org if multiple separated with comma e g get IP 10 0 0 1 www 3322 org Serverto pesbers 5322 org if multiple separated with comma e g update 10 0 0 1 www 3322 org Update interval O Wildcard Unit minute Range 1 60 Default null Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 34 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Running State Monitoring You can check current system running state via running state monitoring system Running State amp Flow The system running state includes CPU utilization memory state configurable NAT connection number WAN interface flow PC network state of LAN and alarm threshold configuration When the running value of one system exceeds the alarm threshold this value is shown in red At the same time the browser bar informs the user of flashing warning prompt and warning tone As shown in the following figure the system refreshes monitoring information per 30 seconds automatically The system status and flow V Enable the CPU utilization monitor Notice that if you enable the function of monitoring the CPU utilization status the mo
48. is 0 which means once in the database overflow Status it stop trying to exit from the status ospfExitOverflow nterval To configure the maximum number of the total amount of various LSAs in the OSPF database The range is max lsa num 0 4294967294 and the default value is 0 Once the maximum value is exceeded the hard or soft processing mode is adopted To shutdown the present ospf process when the total hard amount of various LSAs exceeds the maximum value By default this mode is adopted Only to prompt the alarm message when the total amount of various LSAs exceeds the configured maximum value Default status not configured soft Configure Route Redistribution OSPF can redistribute routes learned from other routing protocols into the OSPF routing area Via the function route map the route redistribution can be controlled conditionally Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 168 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The command redistribute This command redistributes the route generated by the given routing protocol into the OSPF routing area can specify the cost the cost type the route tage and the route map for the route redistribute protocol protocol id metric metric value metric type metric type tag tag value route map route map name no redistribute protocol protocol id metric metric value metric type metric type tag tag value route map route map name Syntax De
49. is 1 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 169 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Configure Route Filtering The following functions can be configured to filter some routing informations Prevent the routing updating packets from passing an interface In order to prevent other routers in a same network from learning routes users can prevent from sending the routing updating messages on an interface The routing messages are neither sent nor received on the interface The command passive interface This command restrains the route updating information from being sent and received on the given interface passive interface interface name ip address no passive interface interface name ip address Syntax Description The name of the interface on which the route updating interface name information needs to be restrained Can specify to restrain the route updating on an address of ip address the interface Default status not configured Control route advertisement when route updating The command distribute list out can be used to filter the autonomous system external routes via the access list The command area filter list can be used to filter the type 3 route advertisements of inter area via the access list or the prefix list with in out direction The command distribute list out This command permits or forbid to advertise some autonomous system external routes into the OSPF routing ar
50. is connected and can send receive data normally Off WAN channel is not connected LANO On LANO channel is connected Flickering LANO channel is connected and can send receive data normally Off LANO channel is not connected LAN1 On LAN1 channel is connected Flickering LAN1 channel is connected and can send receive data normally Off LAN1 channel is not connected LAN2 On LAN2 channel is connected Flickering LAN21 channel is connected and can send receive data normally Off LAN2 channel is not connected LAN3 On LAN3 channel is connected Flickering LAN31 channel is connected and can send receive data normally Off LAN3 channel is not connected Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 9 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 MP2000 104B Back Panel IN 100 240 054 LAN FX53 FX52 FRSt FREQ FXO pe OO MP2000 104B AC RESET F f if ERNIE CLIE R The interfaces on the back panel IN 100 240V 0 5A AC power supply input voltage range AC 100 240V 50 60Hz LAN3 0 10 100M LAN Ethernet port 3 0 WA 10 100M WAN Ethernet interface FXS3 0 FXS port 3 0 RESET Multi functional reset switch Installation Preparations security Before and during MP2000 104B Router installation please abide by following rules so as to avoid casualty or damages resulting from various accidents e Read this manual carefully e Place MP2000 104B Router proper
51. j MP2000 1044 1 SSAP ppoooo 1044 2 A business center adopts data private network composite mode originally It will adopt internet network composite mode when the user needs to extend data and VOIP business to each network site Each site connects directly the phone and PC to MP2000 104B Router and performs ADSL dial up In such case VPN function should be configured in MP2000 104B Router at the same time Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 94 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Via H323 voice protocol MP2000 104B Router 1 and 2 register to gatekeeper which is in private network internally The user needs to create a tunnel from MP2000 104B Router 1 to VON Server and apply two policies to adapt to connections to gatekeeper and MP2000 104B Router 2 By such network composite mode data and voice business are extended to each site effectively On the other hand it slashes high cost of private network composite VPN function of MP2000 104B Router ensures security of data and voice transmission in public network Take MP2000 104B Router 1 as an example First configure PPPOE dial up line In WAN configuration choose configuration wizard of accessing WAN and click Next Choose a port connecting to internet Take WAN port as example Click Next to choose the type for your internet connection We choose PPPOE dial up line here Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN WAN Connection Type Choose the type f
52. local address and internal global address When a fixed address has to visit a internal address externally the static translation is valid The following table displays static addresses translation settings of current device Click to delete relevant settings Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 104 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 static addresses translation settings Static addresses translation Local address Local service Global address Global service Config 192 168 16 0 255 255 255 0 128 255 16 0 255 255 255 0 x Click Add to pop up setting interface Local E address Enter the Inner IP Address to be converted e g 192 168 0 1 or Network Address e g 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 Global l address l Enter a global unique IP address e g 221 18 10 5 Protocol Use it when Port mapping Local Address input internal IP address such as 192 168 0 2 or input internal network address or subnet mask for internal network such as 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 Global Address input legal IP address allocated by NIC or ISP Protocol it is None by default namely only perform one to one translation between internal network to external network Choose TCP or UDP can realize port mapping function See settings in the following figure Local 1 address Enter the Inner IP Address to be converted e g 192 168 0 1 or Network Address e g 192 168 0 0 25
53. of the neighbor the unit is second If an OSPF router has not received the hello packet from the neighbor router after waiting for such a period then the neighbor is regarded as down To Enable demand circuit on the interface To make the interface not run OSPF To Set time interval for the interface sending HELLO packets the unit is second To Set MD5 authentication To specify the maximum transmission unit of the interface only take effect in ospf To ignore mtu when DD packets inter communicating To set OSPF network type broadcast network non broadcast network point to point network point to multipoint network point to multipoint non broadcast network To Set priority of the router the parameter is used when DR electing To Set time interval for re transmitting the lost link state advertisement To Set delay for transmitting the connection Status before Commands means that there config if xx config if xx config if xx config If xx config if xx config if xx config if xx config if xx config if xx config if xx config if xx config if xx is the configuration example to explain the command in details later 2 Above commands all have corresponding no commands which are used for cancel the corresponding configurations and functions 3 The old versions before 5 1 x do not permit to enable only one ospf process and no interface is in up status that is when initializing a router the os
54. receive send route refresh Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Configure the community attributes to be sent to the BGP peer entity or peer entity group Configure the timer of BGP peer entity or peer entity group Configure allowing EBGP peer entities or peer entity groups on the network that are not connected directly to be connected Configure the source address used when setting up connection with BGP peer entity or peer entity group and sending update packets or specify the interface address as source address Configure the distribution filtering list applied on the BGP peer entity or peer entity group Configure the AS PATH attribute filtering list about BGP route applied on BGP peer entity or peer entity group Configure the prefix filtering list applied on the BGP peer entity or peer entity group Configure only BGPV4 is received Configure the local supported capability notification when negotiating with BGP peer entity or peer entity group config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp a
55. record according to real Situation The IVR system begins to build call connection from the caller to the extension IVR Record If the user sets IVR access number as 111111 and record number as 222 he should first dial 111111 according to prompt and then dial record number 222 At this time system will inform the user with prompt please make record by pressing and end it with Press to start record and press to save record IVR record voice file is welcome 729 711 723 When the user dials IVR access number Router plays corresponding welcome files according to code mode provided by line negotiation so as to inform the user of the second dial up or other actions A voice play file by default is welcome 729 IVR call or IVR record cannot be performed at the same time IVR record function can be used to modify voice file welcome 729 711 723 It is suggested that system administrator should delete record number after applying such function so as to avoid voice file modification resulted from wrong record number when the user dials IVR access number IVR authentication After IVR authentication is started the user will hear prompt Please input your username and end it with after dialing access number 111111 Then it comes another prompt Please enter your password and end it with Based on successful authentication the user is required to dial extension number or system will inform the user of prompt p
56. route selecting and route filtering LO 2 2 2 2 32 92 1 1 2 24 OTY ROUTER B LO 3 3 3 3 32 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 219 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Illustration RouterA RouterB RouterC and RouterD are connected as shown in the figure above Configure the command route map on RouterC and modify the local preference of route information matching the access list 1 1 1 0 24 so that the data of 1 1 1 0 24 accessed by Router D can reach Router A via Router C RouterA is located in AS 100 RouterB RouterC and RouterD are located in AS 200 RouterA configuration Command Description RouterA configure terminal Enter the Global Configuration Mode RouterA config interface loopback0O RouterA config if loopback0 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterA config if loopback0 interface loopback1 RouterA config if loopback1 ip address 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 0 RouterA config if loopback1 interface s1 0 Enter interface s1 0 RouterA config if seriall 0 encapsulation hdlc Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC RouterA config if seriall 0 ip address 192 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterA config if seriall 0 interface s2 0 RouterA config if serial2 0 encapsulation hdlc RouterA config if serial2 0 ip address 193 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterA config if serial2 0 exit RouterA config router bgp 100 Enter BGP Configuration Mode RouterA config bgp ne
57. router configuration for further information about number strategies number modification gatekeeper register encoding mode etc Click Scvanced tg display physical features and other advanced configurations of the port Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 53 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 QWvoice Port Config gt Advanced Advanced configurations of Voice port Port FXS 1 port to configure Disable DSP input 0 Unit db Range DSP output i Unit db Range 10 10 volume 10 10 Default 0 volume Default 0 Max JitterBuffer 150 Unit ms Min JitterBuffer 35 Unit ms Range 0 255 delay Range 0 300 Default 150 delay Default 35 Range 1 5 VAD Disable Default 2 Default disable Payload Reverse polarity Display the calling number Direct Outward a cae C Enable Direct Outward Dial i Unit s Range lt 0 Dial delay 10 gt Default 0 Hot line dial 5 Unit second Hot line dial time Range 0 5 Default 5 number Port select one voice port to be configured Disable Disable the port DSP input volume and DSP output volume set DSP volume within range from 10db to 10db with default as O db The negative value stands for decrease and positive value stands for increase Max Jitter Buffer delay set max buffer time for buffer area Default 150 ms Min Jitter Buffer delay set minbuffer time for buffer area Default 35 ms
58. router id Syntax Description router id The router ID bgp confederation identifier command The command is used to configure the autonomous system number of the BGP confederation The no form of the command is used to delete the configuration bgp confederation identifier as number no bgp confederation identifier as number Syntax Description as number The autonomous system number bgp confederation peers command The command is used to configure the sub autonomous system number belonging to BGP confederation The no form of the command is used to delete the sub autonomous system number from the BGP confederation bgp confederation peers as number no bgp confederation peers as number Syntax Description as number The autonomous system number Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 205 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 bgp default local preference command The command is used to configure the default local priority of BGP route The no form of the command is used to recover the default value of the local priority bgp default local preference value no bgp default local preference value Syntax Description value The local priority The value range is 0 4294967295 Default status By default the local priority is 100 bgp default ipv4 unicast command The command is used to configure each peer entity enables the functions of notifying and receiving BGP route of ipv4 unicast address by d
59. router rip no router rip Default status do not run RIP protocol Command mode Global Configuration Mode The command address family Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 123 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 This command enables VRF and enters the RIP protocol VRF configuration mode This command makes RIP learn routing in the specified VRF The no format of the command is to disable VRF of RIP protocol address family ipv4 vrf vrf name no address family ipv4 vrf vrf name Syntax Description vrf name The VRF name of the enabled VRF Default status do not enable VRF Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode The command auto summary This command enables the route auto aggregation function in RIP version 2 Route auto aggregation means that all sub net routes in the same natural network segmemt aggregate to be a route of a natural mask when they are being notified to outside the no format of the command can be used to disable the route auto aggregation function in RIP version 2 auto summary no auto summary Default status no route auto aggregation function in RIP version 2 Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode Note Route auto aggregation function is always enabled in RIP version 1 RIP version 1 doesn t support host routes When RIP version 1 is sending the default route 0 0 0 0 0 the route auto Summary doesn t need to run The command default information origin
60. rules The user can adjust index order via index conversion Under current sequence the called number is 003 if calling number is 001 The rules with index as 1 are all valid in black white list inquiry At this time call building is disabled for calling number and called number are all contained in black list Make index conversion Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 64 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Current index Source index of Black white list index conversion Destination index Destination index of Black white list index conversion cance Index sequence changes like this Configuration Information of Black white list Content of Black white list Configuration Calling number 112 Black list Edit Delete OR Calling number 001 Black list Edit Delete Calling number 002 White list Edit Delete Calling number 003 Black list Edit Delete Calling number 004 White list Edit Delete Calling number 113 Black list Edit Delete Adjust the original rules with index as 1 to the position of rules with index as 3 and then shift back rules with index as 3 and other rules in sequence In current sequence the called number is 003 if the calling number is 001 In black white list matching the rules with index as 2 are valid At this time call building is enabled for calling number and called number are all contained in white list Call Service Configuration On this interface the use
61. the neighbor use the route to re calculate directly if the local does not save but the neighbor supports route update send the route update message to the neighbor Perform the soft re configuration on the route sent by the router Perform the soft re configuration on routes sent by the router and routes entering the router at the same time Inform the BGP neighbor via orf mechanism after the configurations of the local input prefix list change Display BGP route information bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable Page 188 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 prefixes cidr only community list community_list_name exact match filter list filter_list_name inconsistent as prefix list prefix_list_name quote regexp regexp str_quote regexp regexp str route map map_name show ip bgp paths Display summary information of AS PATH enable attributes of BGP route show ip bgp attribute info Display summary information of BGP route enable attributes show ip bgp community info Display summary information of BGP route enable community attributes show ip bgp scan Display inform
62. the router The command is telnet 128 255 255 1 After executing the command the output result is Connecting to 128 255 255 1 Display system prompt of the router router gt Press the Ctrl combination key to return to the telnet program Microsoft Telnet gt When the user logs in to the router via other Telnet client program and if the command editing environment works abnormally refer to the corresponding instructions to configure Telnet client program RIP Dynamic Routing Configuration RIP Routing Information Protocol is a kind of distance vector interior gateway routing protocol which is usually applied for the simple small scale networks learning routes The section mainly explains how to configure RIP dynamic routing protocol to interconnect networks Main contents of The section are Description of related commands for configuring RIP protocol Examples of configuring RIP protocol Monitor and debug RIP protocol Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 121 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 RIP Basic Commands Command router rip address family ipv4 vrf vrf name auto summary default information originate default metric metric distance distance distribute list access list name prefix prefix list name in out interface interface maximum paths max number maximum prefix max number warning number neighbor ip address network network numbe
63. this interface WAN Interface Information WAN Link Interface WAN Connection Type Fixed Address IP Address 128 255 16 91 Subnet Mask 255 255 252 0 Default Gateway Enable Gateway Monitor Yes Interval 3000 second Preferred DNS server 10 0 0 10 Alternate DNS server 10 0 0 11 DNS Server Configuration The user can set global DNS server address for gateway via this interface DNS configuration DNS configuration Preferred DNS server 10 0 0 100 Alternate DNS server 10 0 0 11 QoS Service Configuration The QoS Configuration interface provides a configuration guide to help you finish the QoS service configuration of VoIP data priority transmission Click it to enter the first configuration interface Configuration Wizard of Qos Choosing Interface for WAN Connection This router can connect to Internet via multi interface Please choose the corresponding interface according to the cable or fibre that you used Choose the interface WAN se VOIP data first Qos Enable Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 29 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Choose the interface Select the WAN interface on which the QoS service is based on The WAN access mode of the interface can be fixed address line or PPPoE dial up line Currently only WAN port can be selected VOIP data first QoS Enable disable VoIP data first transmission function By default it is disabled
64. tone Call Wait Configuration Click Enable call wait checkbox in Call Wait configuration to initiate call wait business Click Add to add a new wait service Call service configuration a Call Wait configuration Local telephone z 2 A The number which need to register call wait service numbers 401 404 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 70 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Choose a telephone number from Local telephone numbers and press to add it to the number which needs to register call wait service Finally press Apply to set it as the number which needs to register call wait service Press to delete the chose number from The number which needs to register call wait service Note The voice port corresponding to local number should be in enable state and this number has not registered other call services System filters automatically the local numbers that have registered other call services as well as the disabled numbers of voice port Application of Call Wait Follow the instructions below to choose reject or leave unanswered the new call Press hook switch and then press 1 to reject new call Press hook switch and then press 2 to receive new call No action indicates to leave it unanswered After receiving new call the user can switch between two communications at any time Follow the steps below Press hook swit
65. transmitted during the process of initializing the neighbor or when reflecting the changes of the topology When the topology has big changes and routes need to be calculated again the LSAs which reflect changes are transmitted on the demand circuit so that the integrality of the network can be maintained The command tp ospf demand circuit This command enables the demand circuit on the OSPF interface If it is on a point to point network the command takes effect by just being configured on one peer end Of course the routers of the two peers need to support the demand circuit function If it is on a point to multipoint network the command can just be configured on the multipoint peer ip ospf ip address demand circuit no ip ospf ip address demand circuit Syntax Description lp address Can individually specify the OSPF interface of an address on OSPF interface as the demand circuit Default status not configured not the demand circuit Note e In order to Enable demand circuit between routers it can just be configured on one side interface can be configured on both side interfaces e The demand circuit only takes effect in the point to point and point to multipoint interface mode e Please do not Enable function on the broadcast or nbma network because on the broadcast or nbma network protocol packets cannot be restrained effectively Generate Default Route Once a router is specified to redistribute routes of othe
66. white list The Calling The Called Black List Undefined Undefined The rules are shown below as arrows indicate Numbers in Calling Black List are feasible to call numbers in Called White List Numbers in Calling White List are feasible to call any called numbers Numbers in Calling Undefined is recognized as White List Numbers Black white List Configuration interface is shown as below it is the configured black white list bar with four buttons Add Index Conversion Clear and Refresh Black white List Configuration Configuration Information of Black white list Index Content of Black white list Configuration 1 Calling number 401 Increment 2 Black list i X 2 Calling number 402 Increment 2 Black list i a a Click Add to add new black white list configuration Edit it as figure shown below Index E The index of black white list Range 0 49 Number to be 1 m 7 f Increment Range is 0 100 configured ee Add erz cece Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 63 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Index The index of black white list Range 0 49 Number to be configured number to be added in black white list Increment The range of increment 0 100 Add add number to be configured to black list or white list it can be the one with wildcard X Click Index Conversion to change current index The system shows you the figure as be
67. with a rule including permit and deny Protocol The protocol type to which the packets belong Source Address The network or host from which the packets are from that is the source address in the IP head of the packet Source Port Specify the source port matching the sent packet It can be a value or range Destination address It is the destination network or host of the packets that is the destination IP address of the packets Destination Port Specify the destination port number matching the received packet It can be a value or range Binding to interface Apply the configured access list to an interface and specify the inwards or outwards packets matching the interface Click Bind List to enter to following page In this page the user can view binding information of access list in current device inwardly and outwardly At the same time the user can modify defined interface or remove access list binding Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 101 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Access List Confiquration gt binding access list Choose interface AN v e Interface toward in Direction Binding Access Table Filtrate the input packets e Interface toward outDirection Binding Access Table Filtrate the output packets Access control list is a powerful tool for firewall to filter packet After definition apply the list to designated direction to control access DHCP Service C
68. with user B or user C This mode can be applied to such situation user A contacts user C and recognizes that user C can better solve problems offered by user B and then it is transferred to communication between user B and user C Call transfer configuration Click Enable call transfer to start call transfer service It is enabled only if the Routers of A and B are both initiated such configuration Call Transfer Application There are two call transfer services in specific application one is direct transfer and the other is call transfer after inquiry Direct transfer Calling B calls called A and called A transfers to user C If user A does not communicate with user C it is called direct transfer For direct transfer there is no requirement of user s position If calling user and called user are not in the same gateway the calling user is required to support H450 protocol or SIP transfer procedure For failed transfer the original communication of calling user and called user is kept interrupted Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 66 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Call transfer after inquiry Calling B calls called A and called A transfers to user C User A has communication with user C first and user B and user C can realize communication between each other only if user A hangs up User A can return to communication with user B if user C hangs up or when transfer fails Call transfer afte
69. 0 1 1 1 via the area 1 router 2 config ospf exit The configuration of router 3 Command Description router 3 config router ospf 1 To enter the OSPF configuration mode router 3 config ospf area 1 virtual link 70 1 1 2 To specify to establish a virtual link to the peer 60 1 1 1 via the area 1 router 3 config ospf exit After configured as above router 3 establishes an adjacency to router 2 by passing the virtual link and achieve at the destination connected with area2 and areaO Monitor amp Debug OSPF The specific statistic information can be displayed For example the OSPF routing table the link state database the interface information the neighbor information The information can be utilized to view the using condition of the resources and solve the network problems The following commands can be used to display statistic information of various routes router Command Description show ip ospf process id To display basic information about OSPF show ip ospf process id border To display information about the routing tables of the border router and routers the autonomous system border router show ip ospf process id To display buffer information of OSPF buffers show ip ospf process id database router network Summary asbr Summary external nssa external opaque link opaque To display related information about the link state database of OSPF the type of the link state can be specified t
70. 0 104B router including local FXS port FXO port configuration H323 configuration fax configuration communications between local phones between local and H323 between local and PSTN and realization of fax function Environment IF Meta ke 3 7 in E l S MP2000 1045 7 nn a Ly VOP Analog Phone The figure above shows a typical VoIP application of MP2000 104B router MP2000 104B router connects to another Ethernet via IP network so as to perform communication and fax with IP phones in other Ethernets At the same time MP2000 104B router can realize communication and faxing with traditional phones by accessing PSTN traditional telecom telephone Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 242 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 network via FXO port In such case MP2000 104B router equals to a small PBX Configuration Steps Let s start now to configure one MP2000 104B router or several MP2000 104B routers owned by you It is easy to perform configuration since MP2000 104B router provides you with very friendly WEB configuration interface and many helps Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 243 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Configure Communication between Local and H323 MP2000 104B router is configured with communication function between local FXS ports by default Now the user needs to configure communication between local FXS port and
71. 10 1 1 1 and 10 1 1 2 meanwhile the gO of Router A connects with another LAN 20 1 1 0 24 A The configuration of Router A Command router A configure terminal router A config interface gigaethernetO router A config if gigaethernetO ip address 20 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 router A config if gigaethernet0 interface gigaethernetl router A config if gigaethernet1 ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 router A config if gigaethernet1 exit router A config router rip router A config rip network 20 0 0 0 router A config rip network 10 0 0 0 router A config rip version 2 B The configuration of Router B Command router B configure terminal router B config interface ethernetO router B config if ethernetO ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 router B config router rip router B config rip network 10 0 0 0 router B config rip version 2 Description To enter Global Configuration Mode To enter the gO interface To configure the ip address To enter the g1 interface To configure the ip address To return to Global Configuration Mode To enter the RIP Configuration Mode To specify the network number run by RIP Same as above To configure the RIP version Description To enter Global Configuration Mode To enter the e0 interface To configure the ip address To enter the RIP Configuration Mode To specify the network number run by RIP To configure the RIP version After the above configuration
72. 104B Router provides 4 LAN ports and 1 WAN port They are 10 100Mbps auto sensing Ethernet ports providing RJ45 interface Without indicator light RJ45 has corresponding LINK SYS light in the front panel 10 100MbaseT cable twisted pair can be applied to connect Ethernet port and other network equipments such as routers The tailpiece pin order of RJ45 is shown as below Pin E The pin definition of the twisted pair interface Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 13 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Straight through Ethernet Cable Connection Relation Table Model C1212 1002 aa e a O Boma Je e pom mas ooo e oS wmm o o ome Tewm oo e pow wwen J o meom White Green TPTXD White Orange TPRXD Note The color paring of twisted pairs in the diagram should conform to EIA TIA 568A standard LANx interface allows auto sensing interleaving and straight through while WAN refuses self adaptation Connect Voice Interface MP2000 104B Router provides 4 FXS interfaces and 1 FXO interface featuring in RJ11 interface Namely connect the line with RJ11 interface to corresponding port MP2000 104B Router provides 4 voice processing channels and FXO interface occupies 1 access fixedly Thus FXS interface enables 3 accesses at most for calling When the user occupies access for call waiting or call transfer less accesses are left for FXS When power fails FXSO connects to FXO port automatically
73. 2 To configure RIP only to receive RIP version 2 packets on the interface 12 To configure RIP to receive RIP version 1 and version 2 packets at the same time on the interface Default status receive packets according to the RIP global version Command mode Interface Configuration Mode The command ip rip receive packet This command configures RIP to enable receiving packets on the interface The no format can be used to disable receiving packets on the interface ip rip receive packet no ip rip receive packet Default status enable receiving packets on the interface Command mode Interface Configuration Mode The command ip rip send version This command configures the version of the packets sent by RIP on the interface and specifies to send packets with which version and which form on the interface The no format of the command can be used to recover to send packets according to the RIP global version ip rip send version 1 2 12 21 12 1 compatible no ip rip send version Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 134 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Syntax Description 1 To configure RIP to send RIP version 1 packets on the interface 2 To configure RIP to send RIP version 2 packets on the interface 12 To configure RIP to send RIP version 1 and version 2 packets at the same time on the interface which means to respectively send an updating packets with two versions 21 To configur
74. 2 config if fastethernet0 address 70 1 1 2 To a the interface address 255 255 255 0 router 2 config if fastethernetO exit The oo of router 3 Command Description router 3 config router ospf 1 To set up OSPF process router 3 config ospf network 30 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 area 1 To specify the corresponding OSPF interface and the area it belongs to router 3 config ospf exit router 3 config interface serial0 0 Router 3 config if serial0 0 physical layer sync Router 3 config if serial0 0 encapsulation ppp To encapsulate PPP router 3 config if serial0 0 ip address 30 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 To configure the interface address Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 173 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Router 3 config if serial0 0 exit After configured as above router 1 can learn the route 30 1 1 0 24 and router 3 can learn the route 70 1 1 0 24 Configure OSPF Interface Parameters The following configuration is to make the OSPF interface between routeri and router2 perform the plain text authentication and configure the hello time as 20 Notice the configurations of router 1 and router 2 need to be consistent which means the authentication mode the password and the hello interval time need to be consistent so that can establish OSPF neighbor The configuration of router 1 Command Description router 1 config int fastethernetO router 1 config if fastethernetO ip ospf
75. 20 0 0 0 8 120 2 via 10 1 1 1 00 00 07 ethernetO RIP Default Route Advertisement In the network topology figure 4 9 configure the notification of the default route on Router A Command Description router A configure terminal To enter Global Configuration Mode router A config interface gigaethernetO To enter the gO interface router A config if gigaethernetO ip address 20 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip address router A config if gigaethernet0O interface gigaethernetl To enter the g1 interface router A config if gigaethernet1 ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip address router A config if gigaethernet1 exit To return to Global Configuration Mode router A config router rip To enter the RIP Configuration Mode router A config rip network 10 0 0 0 To specify the network number run by RIP Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 138 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 router A config rip version 2 router A config rip default information originate The configuration of Router B is the same as 4 To configure the RIP version To notify the default route 2 3 1 Run the command show ip route rip on Router B we can see the information about the default route R 0 0 0 0 0 120 2 via 10 1 1 1 00 00 02 ethernetO RIP Administration Distance Adjustment In the network topology figure 4 9 the configuration of Router A is the same as 4 2 3 1 Adjust
76. 2000kbps by default The PC connections TCP UDP other session total number the threshold of the current PC connections TCP UDP other session it is 1000 by default Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 37 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 PC Connections amp Flow Monitor Number of PC connections and flow monitor Network using status of current accessed PCs Sort by total connections Sort by total rate Sending Rate of Rate of TCP UDP other Rate of send Total oe rate receive receive byte sessions connections PC IP packet pps rate packet Configure name address Sending Receive Number Max pps rate limit pps rate limit pe connection number limit Back Configure gt gt S On this interface you can monitor current accessed PC network state Please refer to next section for parameter limit of PC Connections Limit of Single PC Orc connections and flow settings Max connections limit of single PC IP address Subnet mask Max connections limit Configure Set max connections limit IP address Subnet mask Default limit Customedlimit Not limited Type of max connections limit Max connections Range 100 20000 C Enable max connections limit of single PC Tip if enabled single PC connections limit will take effect Default connections limit of single Range 50 2500 IP address fixed IP address S
77. 255 255 255 0 router A config if ethernet0 ip rip authentication mode md5 router A config if ethernet0 ip rip authentication key 0 maipu router B config router rip Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information To specify the authentication type of RIP as MD5 To specify the authentication password of RIP To return to Global Configuration Mode To enter the RIP Configuration Mode To specify the network number run by RIP Same as above To configure RIP version Description To enter Global Configuration Mode To enter the e0 interface To configure the ip address To specify the authentication type of RIP as MD5 To specify the authentication password of RIP To enter the RIP Configuration Mode Page 147 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 router B config rip network 10 0 0 0 To specify the network number run by RIP router B config rip version 2 To configure RIP version Configure the RIP Version for Sending and Receiving Configuring the version for sending and receiving is mainly used for inter communicating the routing information among different RIP protocol versions router C g 10 1 1 1 24 RIP V2 e0 10 1 1 2 24 router B Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 148 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 As shown in the above figure 4 9 RIP V2 runs between router A and Router B but only RIP V1 can run between Router A and Rou
78. 4B normally via ping command C gt ping 192 168 0 1 Pinging 192 168 0 1 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 255 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 255 The prompts mentioned above imply successful communication between computer and MP2000 104B Router C gt ping 192 168 0 1 Pinging 192 168 0 1 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out The prompts mentioned above indicate failed connection between computer and MP2000 104B Router Please check first the connection of MP2000 104B Router The interface indicator is on in normal state and then check IP address according to setting in step 2 Configuration Open Internet Explorer and input MP2000 104B Router default administration address HTTP 192 168 0 1 in address bar k http 192 168 0 17 advance index hta Windows Internet Explorer ota MP2000 i04A AC User name s Password Remember my password a Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 17 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Input user name and password to enter MP2000 104B Router web management page MA PU pX English Web http www maipu com E mail overseas mail maipu com Tel 86 28 85148850 e i l Product Information WAN Config Welcome to Maipu Web Management System DDNS MP2000 104B AC Version Information Status Monitor System ID 00017a000000 LAN Config
79. 5 255 255 0 Global address Enter a global unique IP address e g 221 18 10 5 Protocol Use it when Port mapping Local port The port of the Service that is provided by the host in the LAN range 1 65535 Global port You can specify an outside port to map tothe opened port of inner host range1 65535 i Jct Port mapping enables PC in internal network to provide network service for external network After setting the internet user can use services provided by LAN PC via global address accessing In such case the local address should be IP address of the host which provides services in internal network while the global address should be IP of external network interface or IP provided by ISP Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 105 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Local Port The port of the service that is provided by the host in the LAN Please refer to Port to Service Table Global Port designate a port as public port Port to Service Table Network Services Protocol O 9 ww Webpage Viewing ww TC TCP TC TC oO telnet Remote Management telnet smtp Mail Transmission Protocol pop2 pop3 domain smtp pop2 pop3 domain Bo Post office protocol 2 Post office protocol 3 domain service TCP TC Border Router protocol h go File Transfer Protocol O tp ftp data O an File data connectio
80. A config rip af network 20 0 0 0 router A config rip af version 2 router A config rip af exit To Enable VRF b instance of RIP To specify the network number run by RIP To configure the RIP version To return to the RIP Configuration Mode The configuration of Router B is the same as 4 2 3 1 cannot learn the routers in vrf b on Router B RIP Authentication Configuration In the network topology figure 4 6 authentication on Router A and Router B The configuration of Router A Command router A configure terminal router A config interface gigaethernetO users need to enable MD5 Description To enter Global Configuration Mode To enter the gO interface router A config if gigaethernetO ip address 20 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip address router A config if gigaethernetO interface gigaethernetl To enter the g1 interface router A config if gigaethernet1 ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip address router A config if gigaethernet1 ip rip authentication mode md5 router A config if gigaethernet1 ip rip authentication key 0 maipu router A config if gigaethernet1 exit router A config router rip router A config rip network 20 0 0 0 router A config rip network 10 0 0 0 router A config rip version 2 The configuration of Router B Command router B configure terminal router B config interface ethernet0 router B config if ethernetO ip address 10 1 1 2
81. Calling Fax Backup Config 2008 GW 128 255 16 97 10 g729 xX 2XXX GW 128 255 16 97 10 g729 disable xX 2009 GW 128 255 16 97 10 g729 pass through x 2010 GW 128 255 16 97 10 g729 t38 x aa eeren J Eac Now we can fax with the dial peer which is configured with fax capability As a called gateway it confirms self fax type by checking dial peer of calling number when receiving IP calls For example when phone number 2009 is dialing via the fax capability of gateway is confirmed as pass through If it is phone number 2010 the fax capability of gateway is confirmed as T38 If it is called by phone number 9000 which conforms to index 100 global fax capability will be used since there is no fax protocol configuration under this index When local fax mode is confirmed fax is feasible only if the opposite terminal has the proper fax mode to match with local one Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 257 of 257
82. DNS server 10 0 0 11 Through the above steps you configure the Internet connection of MP2000 104B router successfully For more details refer to the next chapter Set Administrator Password Enter System Administration gt Administrator Settings from navigation menu to modify administrator username and password Input new password and click Apply System informs the user of successful modification by a prompt If the user enters into other pages or refreshes this page the system requires the user to enter new password to perform normal configuration With protection function PC refuses to enter equipment page within 3 minutes provided the user fails to input accurate password for 3 times continuously IE informs the user of Access Denied invalid user login so quickly please try later It is strongly recommended to modify and keep the password before you use this equipment so as to avoid unnecessary trouble Administrator Settings Change the Login password Username New password Confirm the password Set the enable password New password Enable or disable the Enable Disable guest user Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 22 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Voice Default Configuration For convenient use MP2000 104B router performs default configurations for voice function in the factory which simplifies configuration steps The basic voice
83. E eee ee eee 40 LAN Interace Conigur atO eccune TE EA AEE O 40 Voice Data Separation Configuration swicacavscaccenceecune sede denteestndtoncesatutcusine weeded sacudedeencenndosexnteces 41 VLAN CONT JU IOT er Tt teen etre eter ere at met ee ner nee er rene ne ee ree een tren eer 42 FO MINVOM aspres ra E S E O 43 Switch Part Connora ON aneirin aan ia ARE AESA 44 e eS eE T E E E E E E EE ee eee 45 Protocol Conngu NO ission a ARE A AOE ceetanecante 45 Advanced ConniguratO Moiscs indenni eaa a E a aat 52 NAT Traversing Configuration s sssssssssssssrsrrrrsrsnrsrnrrnrnrnrsrrnrnnnnnnnnrennnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnonnnnnnnnonnnnn nnne 52 Voe POLE COMMOM al seee E E E 53 Number Transform Configuration iieicisininceacusndunnsrnsnodsedaavcendel eddadinedcensecidonessintucncedraadsseuencentanese 57 Calk Route COMMU AOL esrar restate tule nedanie on ciietasarteneletedonnmde abe idesRcandes Soeaemvageioalsbelenten 59 Biack white LIS COMMOUIaNON siscsacesanpeneicuesebceaetudteamencnaicemceldacwalaaennenseunaandiee r T 63 CAN Ser Vie COG ial IG eE EE E NE 65 Call PICKUP OlmGOUPAnlON caccsacenca teste sonic ceucceas a a i aa oss eieectivecoareeeute 71 Group Ring Onn Gira OWacaseteteastecicbnsdtcte to ace serada e aa e aaia e aS 73 IVR System COMMU AON a iccaceencnnctarenseactanncsnncacttdunectnsgsnatactecempreuenannaoantatesmntantesassnbeatereest ian 15 Accounting Authentication COMMU AON ssccccvesnintevcovnsreusesnosuneatuvensesonrenoaicaanonteeeuinieetwiedeeineie
84. ID Monitor version IOS version IOS file name compiled time of ISO WEB system version compiled time of WEB system and current running mode of the gateway The user can switch the mode here and take new mode into effect by restarting equipment Welcome to Maipu Web Management System MP2000 104B AC Version Information System ID 00017 a000000 Monitor Yersion 1 17 5 IOS Version 8 2 2 105 Image File ro10 i 8 2 2 bin Compiled Time of IOS 2008 4 10 09 05 27 WEB System Version 1 1 build 48 Compiled Time of WEB System 2008 4 8 17 29 08 Running Mode Router A Route Mode amp Switch Mode The user is required to choose the running mode of the device when logging in to the homepage of the configuration page MP2000 104B Router can work in route mode or switch mode The device generally runs in router mode WAN interface of the device refers to Wide Area Network interface which connects the device to WAN The device connecting to the LAN interface has access to WAN via WAN interface In some networking modes it needs to choose switch mode when the user adopts WAN port as one LAN port In switch mode WAN port of equipment is transferred to LAN port similar to other four LAN ports Nevertheless it has one more function when compared to other four LAN ports it prints voice streams and data streams sent from this port with VLAN tags In switch mode we usually connect WAN interface to upper switch to form the networkin
85. In such case phone of FXSO interface can get via by PSTN exterior line connected to FXO interface so as to ensure regular communication Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 14 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Power Connection MP2000 104B adopts stable power system with low requirement for input AC mains It is recommended to use following power sockets or multi function microcomputer power socket Lead ground wire of power supply to ground accurately For common buildings the ground wires are buried during initial cable laying but the customers should make conformation once more or take corresponding measures Common power socket diagrams Ground Wire Earth Wire Firing Wire Please make connection and turn on power according to following steps Step 1 Please connect one end of power line to power input port in back panel of MP2000 104B Router Step 2 Plug the other end of power line in power socket AC power 220V 50Hz 60Hz Step 3 Please check whether power light in front panel of MP2000 104B Router is on If not repeat step 1 and step 2 Please contact agent if power indicator light is still off Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 15 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Immediate Configuration The chapter explains how to configure MP2000 104B Router immediately Preparation The default IP address of MP2000 104B Router internal interface
86. KK GW 128 255 16 97 i g729 disable T Kx 2009 GW 128 255 16 97 g729 pass through 4 x 2010 GW 128 255 16 97 g729 lt 4 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 255 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 In the above figure the fax capability of Index 5 is disabled so it has no fax capability here The fax capability of Index 9 is pass through namely the transparent transmission mode The fax capability of Index 10 is configured If the user configures Enable global T 38 capability of this gateway this port faxes in T38 fax mode Otherwise it has no fax capability How to configure fax capability of each dial peer You should keep a point in your mind only under VOIP dial peer Click Add in the figure to add a VOIP dial peer The fax protocol is blank by default We can click on the right side of dial peer to configure its fax capability Click icon on the right side of Index 10 to display following interface call route config VOIP dial peer configuration Index a Range 1 100 auto Route phone number matching rule can configure completely phone number matching or prefix phone number matching Use x present for a digit use present for any digits of any length e g 028x present for any number that match prefix 028 Feer gateway v 126 255 16 9T Phone number Target Route priority t Priority decreases as the digit increase T29 Ww preferred j ec when maki
87. MAIPU MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Maipu Communication Technology Co Ltd No 16 J iuXing Avenue Hi Tech Park Chengdu Sichuan Province P R China 610041 Tel 86 28 85148850 85148041 Fax 86 28 85148948 85148139 URL http www maipu com Mail overseas maipu com Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 1 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 All rights reserved Printed in the People s Republic of China No part of this document may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written consent of Maipu Communication Technology Co Ltd Maipu makes no representations or warranties with respect to this document contents and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any specific purpose Further Maipu reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in its content without being obligated to notify any person of such revisions or changes Maipu values and appreciates comments you may have concerning our products or this document Please address comments to Maipu Communication Technology Co Ltd No 16 J iuXing Avenue Hi Tech Park Chengdu Sichuan Province P R China 610041 Tel 86 28 85148850 85148041
88. Modify the distance of each route type of OSPF The configuration of router 1 Command Description router 1 config router ospf 1 To enter the OSPF configuration mode router 1 config ospf distance ospf external 120 inter area 90 To modify the distance value of each intra area 60 route type router 1 config ospf exit The displaying results after modified router 1 show ip route ospf Codes C connected S static R RIP O OSPF OE OSPF External M Management D Redirect E IRMP EX IRMP external o SNSP B BGP i ISIS Gateway of last resort is not set O 26 26 26 26 32 60 2 via 70 1 1 2 00 00 03 fastethernetO O 30 1 1 1 32 90 2 via 70 1 1 2 00 00 03 fastethernetO OE 77 77 77 77 32 120 20 via 70 1 1 2 00 00 03 fastethernetO Configure NSSA Area Users can configure the areal as NSSA area thus if redistribute the external routes on router 3 then the external routes is advertised with NSSA LSA in area 1 on the area border router 2 the NSSA LSA is translated to external LSA and be advertised to the area 0 For example Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 179 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The configuration of router 2 router 2 config router ospf 1 To enter the OSPF configuration mode router 2 config ospf area 1 nssa To configure area 1 as NSSA area The configuration of router 3 Command Description router 3 config router ospf 1 To enter the OSPF c
89. O Poe After selecting the interface click Next to enter the interface for selecting the access line type Select the desired access type and continue to click Next until finishing the configuration Here fastethernetO 1 is added successfully Interne AACE eS SPEA Sea ATER Interneticeeze AEN a Oo BEHER C BR EEMISPIRS SET IPH EB PP PPPoEH Seeks UARA ea b JRE Add a VLAN via the VLAN configuration in WAN Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 109 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 After adding the sub interface fastethernetO 1 successfully enter WAN configuration VLAN configuration to find that the configured sub interface fastethernetO 1 exists in the Configure the interface drop down list Owlan E Yla ARa lan ID HAVLAN HTE fll Vlan ID i vlan ID 38 1 4094 RAKHA COE r HYLLAN Input 1 in the Vlan ID box select fastethernetO 1 as the configured interface and click Set to add a VLAN system Management Basic Information Configuration Basic information configuration shows configuration of some basic information system name system time username telephone physical location and system uptime etc In this configuration page you can view some configured information System name Fouter Max length 31 characters System time 1970 ji fi o2 33 Thursday Time zone UTC Username Max length 50 characters Telep
90. P protocol to send DTMF messages RTP NTE mode adopts the RTP packets complying with RFC2833 protocol to send DTMP massages You can Set dynamic payload type which is 101 by default The dynamic payload type cannot be the same as the payload type of T38 RTP fax mode NAT Traversing Configuration Enable STUN client Tick the Enable STUN client check box Otherwise it is disabled Enabling STUN client requires selecting the interface bound by STUN protocol from the Current binding interface drop down list Primary STUN server status The current running status of primary STUN server including Active and Blocked Primary STUN server domain name The domain name of primary STUN server Primary STUN server IP address The IP address of primary STUN server Primary STUN server port The port of primary STUN server Backup STUN server status The current running status of the standby STUN server including Active and Blocked Backup STUN server domain name The domain name of standby STUN server Backup STUN server IP address The IP address of standby STUN server Backup STUN server port The port of standby STUN server NAT type auto detect period The period of STUN client automatically detecting NAT type NAT keep alive time Mapping updating time Set time of the local updating the public network mapping address type Current type of NAT The current NAT type You can use the detect NAT type button to detect NAT type manually
91. P server from the network If there is DHCP server on the network DHCP server distributes an IP address for the device Select appropriate Internet access line input the desired configuration parameters select Next to enter the Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN Finish interface If fixed address line is selected the Finish interface iS Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN Finish The below is your configuration click the Done button to save them WAN Link Interface WAN Connection Type Fixed Address IP Address 128 255 16 91 Subnet Mask 255 255 252 0 Default Gateway 128 255 19 254 Preferred DNS server 10 0 0 10 Alternate DNS server 10 0 0 11 Enable Gateway Monitor Yes Interval 3000 second Line PRI High Previoug Done Exit Click Done to finish external network configuration To confirm whether Internet access configuration is successful click WAN Interface Information and you can see whether the WAN interface gets the IP address successfully If the WAN interface is configured as Fixed Access Line the WAN Interface Information interface is Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 21 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 QWAN Interface Information WAN Link Interface WAN Connection Type Fixed Address IP Address 128 255 16 91 Subnet Mask 255 255 252 0 Default Gateway Enable Gateway Monitor Yes Interval 3000 second Preferred DNS server 10 0 0 10 Alternate
92. SA translate always translate candidate translate never To specify the role of NSSA area ABR when translating the translator role role type 7 LSA to the type 5 LSA there are three options always candidate and never Default status not configured the area is a normal area Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 161 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Note e The backbone area cannot be configured as nssa area e Any router in a same area needs to support nssa area otherwise the neighborhood relation cannot be formed among the routers e If possible do not use displaying redistribution on nssa abr Because the packets translated through the router are confusable e Can generate a type7 default route to get to the destination network outside the autonomous system when configuring the default route the type7 default route is being sent to the NSSA area or NSSA border router Configure OSPF Inter Area Route Summarization The route summarization is a set of routes generated by the area border router and the autonomous system border router it advertises to the neighbor router If the serial numbers of the networks in an area are continuous the area border router and the autonomous system border router can be configured as the advertising summarization route The summary route specifies the range of the network serial number The route summarization reduces the size of the link state database T
93. Submit Upgrade Packets Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 234 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Enter the configuration management of Masterplan Device program file management click Add to display interface of adding files select the upgrade packet to be submitted and edit the related information Trem x ERE EA OA Tae De wis E TFTPirelease yee Router z te PPS Package TERR a 3 0 43 Ww Pai AREARE admin Awe mp2000 1046 After clicking Add the upgrade packet begins to be uploaded The process of submitting the upgrade packet is recorded It records whether each sub packet and sub file in the upgrade packet are submitted successfully which is convenient for confirming which file is not uploaded successfully when the uploading fails Ae ie Fem BBE Ae etH BE a Tl aM eet fire AlA eet 17 Em 17 fer ee ENTFTPireleaseiExtiappUeciwing 723 pth fer Ase ENTFTPireleaseios i peo HBr EATFTPireleasetosip ie 6 0 4 39 LO7 gi bin REIH alt alle Hen al fe giia Fi e Discover Device to Be Upgraded Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 235 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Masterplan server adds the service of discovering the device to be upgraded Based on the current network discovery the network management system can automatically compare the current IOS version number on the devic
94. Upgrade application program MP2000 sysupdate 128 255 32 10 mp2000 bin reload lt CR gt Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 230 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 If the reload sub command is added the system prompts whether to restart the router at once and whether to save the configuration after the upgrade If the reload sub command is not added you can execute the reload command or power off to restart the router after the upgrade Here the router prompts Do you really update mp2000 bin yes no Input n lt CR gt to cancel the operation input y lt CR gt to perform the upgrade operation After entering y lt CR gt the router prompts the following information downloading MPROS 4813331 Bytes HHEEHHAHAHAHHEEEEHERAAARAAREEEE RRR RAAAHR ERR RRR RRAHEEE HHEEHHEHAHHAAHAEEEHERERHARAAREEE RRA RRAAHR EERE RR RREHEE HHEHEHEHHAAHHEEEHEREAHAAAAREEE RRR RARE ERR RRR RREHEE HHEHEHHAHHAHHEAEEEHERAA HARARE E RRA RARER ARR RREHEE HHEHEHHEHAHHAHHAEEEHERA AHA RAAREEE RRA RRAAHREHE REAR RRAHEEE HHEHEHEHEHHHAHEEEEHE EA AARAHREEEHR ARR RARER EER RRR OK Download mp2000 bin 4813331 Bytes successed Erase old MPROS from flaSh ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeues Write new MPROS to flash 4813331 bytes written Mp2000 It shows that upgrading IOS files succeeds You just need to restart the router Upgrade bin Files of Application Program via live update Breakpoint Transmission Command
95. XO port Reverse Polarity Enable reverse polarity function Then FXO port checks reverse polarity signals sent by peer FXS port If FXO exterior line is not equipped with reverse polarity function and gateway initiates this function at the same time it results in 1 minute disconnection For other configurations that are same with that of FXS port pleases refer to former parts All gain configuration parameters are divided into negative ones and positive ones by ODB The volume is lower with more negative parameters and vice versa Please adjust DSP gain cautiously or it causes echo Adjust input gain for high or low volume in the peer terminal and adjust output gain for high or low volume of local call Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 56 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Number Transform Configuration Number transform is to transform caller number or called number according to rules set previously The called gateway performs caller identification according to transformed caller number or performs routing according to transformed called number It is convenient for number programming that dial number can be different from calling number There are two transform types Caller Number Transform transform caller number according to rules set previously Called Number Transform transform called number according to rules set previously It doesn t take effect if number transform rule of gateway is
96. able ipv4 multicast Display route information in the BGP global ipv4 multicast route table address Display details of the route with an IP address in the route table address prefix length Display details of the route complying with the network prefix in the route table longer prefixes Display details of the route covered by the network prefix in the route table cidr only Display information of classless route in the route table Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 223 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 community list Display information of routes filtered by community list in the route table community_list_name The name of the community list to be matched exact match Perform exact matching when using community list to filter filter list The information of routes filtered by filter list that is aspath list in the route table filter_list_name The name of the filter list to be matched inconsistent as Display information about routes whose AS numbers in ASPATH attributes are different in the route table pref ix list The information of routes filtered by prefix list in the route table prefix_list_name The name of the prefix list to be matched quote regexp Display information about routes complying with regular expressions with quotations in the route information regexp_str_ quote The regular expressions with quotations regexp Display information about routes complying with the regular expressions
97. able the IVR service IVR record number Configure the IVR record number After the user dials the IVR access number dial the IVR record number After hearing the prompt tone press to begin recording Press or hang up to end the recording The recorded file is restricted by the IVR record time and code Null means not to configure IVR Record Time Range 5 60 Default 60 IVR record codec There are three codes including G 729 G 723 and G 711 The default value is G 729 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 75 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Register IVR access numbers to gatekeeper or SIP server After ticking the item the IVR access number is registered to the gatekeeper or SIP server Otherwise do not register Enable IVR authentication when IVR authentication is enabled the system requires the user to input username and password during access number dialing The user is able to use IVR service only if he gets successful authentication in server For this function it should be in accordance with Maipu NetSmart server At the same time the user should configure AAA authentication in gateway IVR access number You can configure multiple IVR access numbers The IVR access number comprises numbers with a length of 1 25 digits Null means not to configure Click Add and you can configure more IVR access numbers OIR configuration IVR access number configuration There are 9 acces
98. above requirements Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 163 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The application of the virtual link has two conditions to connect two separated backbone areas by configuring the virtual link to connect a third part area to the backbone via an area connecting to the backbone called transit area The command area virtual link This command configures the virtual link passing the transit area to the backbone area Users can configure some interface parameters for the interface of the virtual link such as hello interval The meaning of the interface parameter is consistent with the meaning of the normal OSPF interface area transit area id virtual link address authentication message digest null hello interval seconds retransmit interval seconds transmit delay seconds dead interval seconds authentication key key message digest key key id md5 key no area transit area id virtual link address authentication message digest null hello interval retransmit interval transmit delay dead interval authentication key message digest key key id Syntax Description transit area id The id of the transit area which the virtual link passes address The peer router id address of the virtual link Default status the virtual link is not configured Note e The router configured with the virtual link should be an area border router
99. accounting configuration for communication from VOIP to VOIP Click Clear all authentication configurations and not configure is set automatically for Authentication Function Click Clear all accounting configurations and not configure is set automatically for Accounting Function Fax Service Configuration Currently two kinds of fax modes are supported that is T38 fax mode and transparent transmission mode The T38 fax mode is divided to UDPTL mode and RTP mode The configuration interface of the fax service is W a Fax service configuration Fax service configuration Enable the global T 38 capability of this gateway T38 fax mode UDPTL a Maximal speed 14 4 m Unit kbps default 14 4 High redundancy 0 Range 0 3 Default 0 Low 7 m redundancy Range 0 5 Default 0 Fax pass through code Enable the Error Check Mode of T38 fax It takes effect only when both the facsimile terminals of the two sides of the communication have Ecm function Enable global T 38 capability of this gateway To enable T 38 capability of Router aims at the global Router Once T38 capability configuration is Started the global Router supports T38 fax capability or the user can configure T38 fax capability under some dial port or disable T38 capability for some dial port When gateway is configured as the caller it decides whether to support T38 fax by detecting backwards according to the calling numb
100. acecndessscsszctasdsassiecenesessssen LO BA CIO a E tne Wa veut Pacem auemameaeee du aumunuminntessauenmunimunarataguns 16 SORT AION oss sees cers sone scnuccniesie E E 17 AN COG Fa CHO sees credence tyme cteaameea cen antes EE E E E E spe A EEEE A 18 DHCP Service Configuration gixee cedars cadovuenceicctinvecenceeutisweatecsstuantecetaaheaceveedececuacerocustdeseeecceclact 18 Voice Default Configuration s ssssssssssssssssnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnannunnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnn 23 WEB Configuration Guide cccccsceccseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeesesesesesesesessssssssans 24 DER a E E E E E E E E T 24 WAN COOMMGUIGEION sesecexcsenencec cc ese sas asenesasecsnensqevevesenesenciececiececismaeasaserestecsaamnaeseraes 26 Fed Address Liles amininanbaensmasiurerinatn N E A E debut 27 PRROE DIOE U I re E EE E EE E E E EEE EE SE EEE EE AEE ENOS 28 Ethernet Dynamic Address IMG wuscerscannacasicns sainiicnnssinaienneaminstetnmnnteaeantaaguaehecaoensinainndedteadaunaiens 28 WAN Internrace Mormia tiol senideren ETEA E EEE 29 DNS Server Con NguratOl eerror E E A vel envieeasenceat 29 doS Set VIGS CONN OIA ssr a EE a E 29 System Running State amp FLOW sasassesassnsssannnsnnrnannnnasnnnnnnsasnnsnnnrannnsnsnrnnnnsnsnrnnsnnnnnnsnsnnnnnnnnennnnnn 35 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 4 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 PC Connections amp FOW MOmMCOT sccoatctute cas tace aynineac a e i EE 38 AN COn Or OT a
101. ack3 ip address 255 255 255 255 router 2 config if loopback3 exit router 2 config interface loopback45 router 2 config if loopback4 ip address 255 255 255 255 router 2 config if loopback4 exit router 2 config interface loopback46 router 2 config if loopback4 ip address 255 255 255 255 router 2 config if loopback4 exit Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Description To configure a test standard access list To configure the deny address To configure the permit address To enter the OSPF configuration mode To specify OSPF interface and area To apply the access list name test to the filtering with out direction of areal 44 44 44 44 To configure the interface address 44 44 44 45 To configure the interface address 44 44 44 46 To configure the interface address Page 176 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 After configured as above the area 1 doesn t advertise the route 44 44 44 44 32 to outside only can learn the inter area routes of 44 44 44 45 32 and 44 44 44 46 32 in the area 0 This is a filtering of out direction For the filtering of in direction do not filter routes advertised from other areas for example configure a filtering of in direction on the area O and configure it on the area border router The configuration of router 2 Command Description router 2 config ip access list standard maipu To configure a test standard access list router 2 config
102. ally specify the administration distance for a route type To permit or forbid some autonomous system external routes to be advertised into OSPF routing area according to the function of the access list only takes effect on ASBR router To permit or forbid some routes to be added into according to the function of the access list To specify to advertise the host route in the area To record the changes of the adjacency status The maximum number of the concurrent DD packet interactions in a ospf process the default value is 2 To Set neighbor router Set neighbor only when the network mode is NBMA can specify cost parameter for the point to multipoint network type The abr type of ospf is compatible with one of cisco ibm shortcut area and standard To configure the two parameters of the database overflow function ospfExtLsdbLimit the default value is infinite ospfExitOverflow nterval the default value is 0 To configure the maximum number of the LSAs of ospf database and the process mode when the maximum number is exceeded by default the maximum number is infinite and the process mode is hard which means to shutdown the present ospf process If configure it as soft then only the alarm message is prompted The no format of the command can be used to recover to the default value To restrain the route updating information from being sent and received on the given interface To redistribute routes generated by th
103. ame soft in Syntax address as number group_name ipv4 unicast ipv4 multicast vrf_name external clear ip bgp out command The command is used to perform the Description All BGP neighbors Specify IP address of BGP neighbor Re set BGP connection matching AS number The value range is 1 65535 The name of Peer group Process route address cluster information of ipv4 unicast Process route information of ipv4 multicast address cluster Specify the name of the vrf whose route information is processed All EBGP neighbors soft re configuration on the route sent by the router that is re send all routes that the local sends to the neighbor clear ip bgp address as number peer group group name external ipv4 unicast multicast vrf vrf_name soft out Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 212 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Syntax Description All BGP neighbors address Specify IP address of BGP neighbor as number Re set BGP connection matching AS number The value range is 1 65535 group_name The name of Peer group ipv4 unicast Process route information of ipv4 unicast address cluster ipv4 multicast Process route information of ipv4 multicast address cluster vrf_name Specify the name of the vrf whose route information is processed external All EBGP neighbors clear ip bgp soft command The command is used to perform the soft
104. amp Proprietary Information Page 197 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 neighbor neighbor address group name soft reconfiguration inbound no neighbor neighbor address group name soft reconfiguration inbound Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group neighbor activate command The command is used to configure the BGP peer entity or peer entity group to be activated in a local address cluster The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address group name activate no neighbor neighbor address group name activate Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group Default status By default the BGP peer entity or peer entity group is activated only in ipv4 unicast address cluster neighbor description command The command is used to configure the description of BGP peer entity or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to delete the configured description neighbor neighbor address peer_group name description string no neighbor neighbor address peer_group name description Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity peer_group name The name of the peer entity group string The description about the neighbor comprising 0 80 bytes neighbor port command The comman
105. an route calls with called numbers that matched those prefixes to this gateway Two prefixes at most Composed of 0 9 and and separated by gateway Local terminal er ae GHGvalue 60 The type of H323 terminal Default is GW value 60 type H 255 signal port 1720 Range lt 1 65535 gt Default 1720 Master gatekeeper 178 255 16 41 means multicast GK ID HY Port 718 x Backup l means multicast GK ID Port x gatekeeper Notice If you want to use multicast GRQ to find a gakekeeper please enter instead of IP or domain name If you do not want to designate a gatekeeper domain which this gateway try to register please fill in the gatekeeper domain field The range of port is 1 65535 Register to gatekeeper Registration failed Advanced configuration If there is a gatekeeper in network fill in address of gatekeeper and then register to gatekeeper Click Apply to save configuration information With Apply successfully prompt configuring gateway register succeeds Otherwise it fails You can click Advanced configuration hyperlink on the right corner of the interface to configure advanced properties of H323 protocol Check whether register is successful by prompt in yellow on the right side of this option Now we still cannot get via communication with IP phones of other gateways We don t know whom we communication with and how to communication In next section we will perform ca
106. ance of OSPF route For example execute the command show ip route on router 1 we can see the changes of OSPF route s distance Before modifying router 1 show ip route ospf Codes C connected S static R RIP O OSPF OE OSPF External M Management D Redirect E IRMP EX IRMP external o SNSP B BGP i ISIS Gateway of last resort is not set O 26 26 26 26 32 110 2 via 70 1 1 2 00 02 24 fastethernetO intra area route O 30 1 1 1 32 110 2 via 70 1 1 2 00 02 24 fastethernetO inter area route OE 77 77 77 77 32 150 20 via 70 1 1 2 00 02 24 external route fastethernetO Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 178 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Modify the distance of all OSPF routes The configuration of router 1 Command Description router 1 config router ospf 1 To enter the OSPF configuration mode router 1 config ospf distance 100 To modify the distance value of all OSPF route types router 1 config ospf exit The displaying results after modified router 1 show ip route ospf Codes C connected S static R RIP O OSPF OE OSPF External M Management D Redirect E IRMP EX IRMP external o SNSP B BGP i ISIS Gateway of last resort is not set O 26 26 26 26 32 100 2 via 70 1 1 2 00 00 04 fastethernetO O 30 1 1 1 32 100 2 via 70 1 1 2 00 00 04 fastethernetO OE 77 77 77 77 32 100 20 via 70 1 1 2 00 00 04 fastethernetO
107. ance local distance administrative distance network number network mask acl name no distance bgp bgp external distance internal distance local distance administrative distance network number network mask acl name Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 209 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Syntax Description external distance The management distance of BGP external route The value range is 1 255 internal distance The management distance of BGP internal route The value range is 1 255 local distance The management distance of BGP local route The value range is 1 255 network numbe Network address Routes received from all neighbors in the network are set with management distance network mask Network mask acl name The ACL name used to filter which routes are set with management distance Default status By default the management distance of the BGP external route is 20 and the management distance of the BGP internal route is 200 aggregate address command The command is used to configure the aggregation route information sent by BGP The no form of the command is used to cancel the function aggregate address address mask as set Ssummary only no aggregate address address mask as set summary only Syntax Description address The address of aggregation route mask The network mask of the aggregation route as set Generate the route with the AS_PATH attributes of AS
108. and H323 port is complete Please refer to corresponding configuration instruction in Chapter 3 for details Let s dial peer phone number you have configured now Configure Communication between FXS and PSTN MP2000 104B router has a FXO port via which we can communicate with phones in PSTN When FXO port connected with PSTN MP2000 104B router is similar to a special phone in PSTN telephone network Other Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 250 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 PSTN phones can realize communication with other IP phone in MP2000 104B router by dialing PSTN phone numbers corresponding to FXO ports of MP2000 104B router Similarly IP phones in MP2000 104B router can dial any number in PSTN via FXO port In The section we configure communication between FXS and PSTN We still take MP2000 104B route 128 255 16 94 as an example Enter Voice Configuration gt Voice Port Configuration from the navigation bar Woice port configuration Voice port configuration Port State Phone number Configuration FXS 0 enable 401 Advanced FXS 1 enable 402 Advanced FXS 2 enable 403 Advanced FXS 3 enable 404 Advanced FXO O disabled out line Advanced Call route config gt gt Click Advanced hyperlink on the right side of FXO port to display following interface QVoice Port Config gt Advanced Advanced configurations of Voice port Port port to
109. are confed aspath med confed missing as worst bgp always compare med Configure allowing to compare the MED config bgp attributes of BGP route from different AS neighbors bgp cluster id cluster id in ip Configure the cluster ID of the route reflector config bgp cluster id in num bgp router id router id Configure the router ID used by the local BGP config bgp bgp confederation identifier as Configure the autonomous system number of config bgp number the BGP confederation bgp confederation peers Configure the sub autonomous system number config bgp number as number belonging to BGP confederation bgp default local preference Configure the default local priority of BGP route config bgp value bgp default ipv4 unicast Configure each peer entity enables the config bgp functions of notifying and receiving BGP route of ipv4 unicast address by default bgp dampening reach_half life Configure the parameters of BGP route config bgp reuse_value suppress_value suppression config bgp af max suppress time un_reach_half life route map map_name bgp deterministic med Configure BGP to select the best MED routes config bgp received by each AS to compare bgp client to client reflection Configure allowing BGP route reflector to config bgp forward the route information received by a BGP route reflector client to other BGP route reflector client bgp log neighbor changes Configure recording the stats change logs of config
110. area The command area authentication This command configures the authentication type of OSPF area The no format of the command can be used to clear the authentication mode which means it doesn t need to authenticate area area id authentication message digest no area area id authentication Syntax Description area id The area id number authentication To configure OSPF area as the plain text authentication authentication message digest To configure OSPF area as the MD5 authentication Default status no authentication The command area stub This command configures OSPF area as the stub area The no format of the command can be used to clear the configuration of stub area area area id stub no summary no area area id stub no summary Syntax Description area id The area id number no summary To prevent the type 3 LSA from being sent to the stub area Default status not configured the area is the normal area Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 160 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Note e When configuring the stub area the area id number cannot be the backbone area that is the area id cannot be 0 e In the stub area the type 5 LSA that is the external LSA is not accepted and transmitted e The command should be configured on all routers in the stub area the neighborhood relation then can be formed among the routers Configure OSPF as NSSA Area NSSA area is similar with t
111. as in command The command is used to configure allowing receiving BGP route information with local AS number in AS_PATH attributes from BGP peer entity or peering entity group The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address peer_group name allowas in num no neighbor neighbor address peer_group name allowas in Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity peer_group name The name of the peer entity group num The allowed times that the AS number appears in a piece of route information The value range is 1 10 Default status By default the BGP protocol does not receive the BGP route information with local AS number in AS_PATH attributes from BGP peer entity or peering entity group Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 200 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 neighbor attribute unchanged command The command is used to configure not to change the attribute in BGP route when forwarding BGP route to the BGP peer entity or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address peer _group name attribute unchanged as path med next hop no neighbor neighbor address peer_group name attribute unchanged as path med next hop Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity peer_group name The name of the peer entity group as path The as pa
112. ate This command configures the default route 0 0 0 0 0 to be notified and makes itself as the default gateway The no format of the command can be used to cancel the default route to be notified default information originate no default information originate Default status do not notify the default route Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode Note If a default route 0 0 0 0 0 is learned it replaces the configured default route 0 0 0 0 0 The command default metric Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 124 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 This command configures the default measurement of routing items when RIP redistributing other routing protocols the no format of the command can be used to recover the default measurement to the default value default metric metric no default metric metric Syntax Description metric To configure the default measurement value of routing items when RIP _ redistributing other routing protocols The value range is 1 16 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 125 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Default status metric 1 Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode The command distance This command configures the administration distance of RIP routes The administration distance of routes is applied for the election of routes among different protocols whose value is smaller whose priori
113. ation about the next hop enable scanning in BGP show ip bgp vrf vrf_name Display vrf information in BGP enable show ip bgp ipv4 unicast Display neighbor information enable multicast neighbor peer addr advertised routes received prefix filter received routes routes show ip bgp ipv4 unicast Display summary information of BGP neighbor enable multicast summary bgp rfcl771 path select Configure BGP protocol to select route config according to RFC1771 bgp rfcl771 strict Configure the BGP protocol to classify the config ORIGIN attributes of re distributed routes according to RFC1771 Note x before command means it has configuration example description The prompts of all address cluster configuration sub modes are the same config bgp afO in the BGP configurations Therefore there are notes for the commands that can be configured only in some address cluster configuration sub modes If there are no notes the commands can be configured in all address cluster configuration sub modes router bgp command The command is used to Enable BGP process specify the local autonomous system number and enter the BGP protocol configuration mode The no form of the command is used to disable the BGP process and delete the BGP configuration router bgp autonomous system no router bgp autonomous system Syntax Description autonomous system The local autonomous system number The value range is 1 65535
114. authentication To configure the interface authentication mode as the plain text authentication router 1 config if fastethernetO ip ospf authentication key 0 To configure the password of the maipu plain text authentication router 1 config if fastethernetO ip ospf hello interval 20 To configure hello interval time router 1 config if fastethernet0 exit The configuration of router 2 Command Description router 2 config int fastethernetO router 2 config if fastethernetO ip ospf authentication To configure the interface authentication mode as the plain text authentication router 2 config if fastethernetO ip ospf authentication key 0 To configure the password of the maipu plain text authentication router 2 config if fastethernetO ip ospf hello interval 20 To configure hello interval time router 2 config if fastethernet0 exit After configured OSPF interface authentication in this way if there is another OSPF router on the Ethernet of routeri and router2 however it is not configured with the plain text authentication or the plain text authentication password is not maipu it cannot establish OSPF routes with router 1 and router 2 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 174 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Configure OSPF Area Parameters The following configuration is to configure the area 1 as the MD5 authentication and configure the area 1 as the stub area Notice router2 and router3 bo
115. authentication mode can config if xx ip ospf ip address authentication specify the plain text authentication md5 message digest null authentication and no authentication No authentication by default ip ospf ip address To configure the authentication password of the config if xx authentication key 0 7 password plain text authentication To Set OSPF cost of the interface specify the cost config if xx for the packet being sent out from the OSPF interface ip ospf ip address cost cost value Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 153 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 ip ospf ip address database filter all out ip ospf ip address dead interval interval value ip ospf ip address demand circut ip ospf disable all ip ospf ip address hello interval interval value ip ospf digest key password ip address key id message md5 0 7 ip ospf mtu mtu value ip ospf ip address mtu ignore ip ospf network broadcast non broadcast point to point point to multipoint non broadcast ip ospf ip address priority value priority ip ospf ip address retransmit interval interval value ip ospf ip address transmit delay delay value Note 1 The symbol WK To filter the LSA flooding to the OSPF interface not filter by default after the interface is configured with the command LSA is not updated from the interface To Set dead time interval
116. aving the last filed as 0 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 99 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Subnet Mask subnet mask of destination address For Class C address it Should be 255 255 255 0 Gateway The data delivery gateway address matched with the destination network Distance metric That is metric value The number of passed route nodes before reaching the destination address Access List Configuration In this page the user can view and configure access control list ACL ACL consists of one or several filter rules that allow or refuse messages by matching message information and ACL parameters Filtration of access list is a processing course from top to bottom If one packet is matched by some rule the corresponding operation of this rule is performed allow or refuse Otherwise this packet will be processed by next filter rule If no rule matches the packet it is processed by default finally Qaccess List Configuration Access List Name Rules Description Config 1 permit using TCP protocol From any address VoipQos any port Go to any address any port data Qos for T package pass Delete This table displays information of current access list configuration Add a rule the newly created list rule will be added to bottom of list automatically in corresponding list by clicking Delete to delete the whole access list if this list has been referenced before all configura
117. ba easel darian Domain name of SIP server name Register expires 3600 ek Unit second Range 200 3600 Default 3600 Username Password Proxy ip address 192 168 0 99 P in roxy domain waw maipu com name Proxy server port 5960 Range lt 1 65535 gt Default 5060 Registrar server port 5060 Range lt 1 65535 gt Default 5060 Local Port 5060 Range lt 5000 10000 gt Default 5060 Retry invite times Range lt 1 5 gt default 5 times Register to SIP server Current status of register gt gt SIP local area config gt gt Advanced configuration Binding Interface it is specified as SIP protocol running interface of MP2000 104B router optional configuration Adopt proper interface according to VOIP application environment Register IP Address IP Address of SIP server optional Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 49 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Register Domain name Domain name of SIP server optional Ensure that this domain name can be analyzed in DNS server configured Register Expires Time Range lt 200 3600 gt second Default 3600 optional Username Password username password for SIP server log in optional They are provided by SIP server administrator when SIP server performs authentication for SIP terminal SIP Proxy IP Address SIP signals of equipment are transmitted via this server Proxy Domain name domain name of prox
118. below Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 249 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 call route config VOIP dial peer configuration Index Range 1 100 Exxx Route phone number matching rule can configure completely phone Phone number number matching or prefix phone number matching Use x present for a digit use present for any digits of any length e g 028x present for any number that match prefix 028 Feer gateway Target 128 255 16 97 Route priority Priority decreases as the digit increase Encode The preferred voice codec when making a IP call over this dial peer Default g729 Called Apply index of transform rule to called number Apply number transform to calling number Configure the fax capability of the dial peer we M 2xxx in the above figure can match all numbers started with 2 in gateway 128 255 16 97 Click Apply to save call route information you configure and then see it in Voice config gt Call route config Call route config WOIP Config POTS Config Index Phone number Target PRI Encode Called Calling Fax Backup Config 3 2008 GW 128 255 16 97 10 g 29 Sy x D AKXX GW 128 255 16 97 10 g729 ee x Configure the dial plan The symbol of completing dialing Default it means none Timeout value of receiving phone number Unit second Range 1 10 Default 2 Now the configuration for communication between local FXS port
119. bgp BGP neighbors bgp scan time time Configure the interval of the local BGP process config bgp scanning BGP RIB address family ipv4 Enable functions of notifying and receiving BGP config bgp vrfname multicast unicast route of a address cluster and enter the BGP protocol configuration mode of the address cluster network network number Configure the route information of BGP config bgp network mask route map map notification config bgp af name backdoor backdoor maximum paths number ibgp Configure BGP to support load balance config bgp number maximum paths number eibgp Configure the load balance of BGP in the VRF config bgp af number unequal cost number Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information ibgo number sub mode of IPv4 Here the config Page 187 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 redistribute connected ospf as number rip static route map map name distance bgp external distance internal distance _ local distance administrative distance network number network mask acl name aggregate address address mask as set summary only timers bgp holdtime keepalive interval show running config router bgp clear ip bgp address as number peer group group_name external clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast multicast dampening address address prefix length clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast multicast flap statistics
120. bove figure the peer port of voice port 2 0 is FXO 0O port We have configured a number match rule xx for it so the user can dial via original PSTN number Now we have completed configuration for communication between FXS and PSTN Let s dial a PSTN number by IP phone Number Transform Configuration for PSTN Port For programming dialing type conveniently we need to identify numbers of different types For example PSTN numbers start with 028 and IP Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 253 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 numbers start with 193 In such case it is easy for us to identify PSTN number and IP number We have described in detail the configuration of number transform in the previous section so we skip it here The figure below shows a number transform rule with index as 1 The rule of this index is to delete prefix 028 from the numbers beginning with 028 Number transform config a Number transform list index Content of transform rule Configure Delete prefix 025 from the numbers beginning i Delete TOR with 028 CA i 1 028 The number transform rule only takes effect when it is applied in some dial up port Namely number transform rule only goes into effect when it binds with dial up port See the figure below call route config POTS dial peer config Index 4 Range 1 100 0266xxx Route phone number matching rule can configure comp
121. box on the title bar and select all or cancel all the upgrade tasks to be added edit the upgrade task information and click OK to add the upgrade task to the upgrade task list Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 237 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 PRSRISSH x HDALS FE THEE NE TAMTEN ES aT Es s d BSSih PME FEAA Se E E A Aaa AR EE BAE FS HE i MP200 128 25 mp200 mp200 8 21 AA 2008 3 3 14 28 45 64 IFTE Wi EEP CI MP200 128 25 mp200 mpz00 8 21 ASA 2008 3 3 14 28 45 64 FTP ie ERR aE TNES A sae iss E MERES D ALAC After being added to the upgrade task list the upgrade task of the device is enabled The upgrade status row records the status information of the current device upgrade the upgrade error description row records the error information of the upgrade process The upgrade task management interface lists all added upgrade tasks You can search the desired upgrade tasks via the filtering function at the top As shown in the following figure you can view all the tasks to be upgraded being upgraded tasks complete upgrade tasks and failed upgrade tasks Fetes SHE lS eee Fees az es x a gd ps FERRIE FHA EAn Bape HARE H lM 8 21 AAA 2008 3 3 14 28 45 64 FTE H AZP al 8 21 Bef 20083 314 2845 64 FIP ws HAED NESS A HESE REES D FLAC Edit upgrade tasks On the u
122. c routes on Router A Command router A configure terminal router A config interface gigaethernetO router A config if gigaethernetO ip address 20 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 router A config if gigaethernet0 interface gigaethernetl router A config if gigaethernet1 ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 router A config if gigaethernet1l exit router A config ip route 5 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 20 1 1 5 router A config router rip router A config rip network 20 0 0 0 router A config rip network 10 0 0 0 router A config rip version 2 router A config rip redistribute static Description To enter Global Configuration Mode To enter the gO interface To configure the ip address To enter the g1 interface To configure the ip address To return to Global Configuration Mode To configure the static routing To enter the RIP Configuration Mode To specify the network number run by RIP Same as above To configure the RIP version To configure RIP to redistribute the Static routes The configuration of Router B is the same as 4 2 3 1 Router B then can learn the route 5 1 1 0 24 via RIP R 5 1 1 0 24 120 2 via 10 1 1 1 00 00 06 ethernetO Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 144 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Configure the Default Cost of RIP Redistribution The default cost of redistribution is 1 The command default metric can be used to change the default cost In the networ
123. can individually specify the administration distance for a route type distance dist all ospf intra area dist1 inter area dist2 external dist3 no distance dist all ospf Syntax Description The administration distance of OSPF routes include intra aera area inter area and external routes the range is 1 255 dist The administration distance of the intra area route the range is 1 255 the default value is 110 dist2 The administration distance of the inter area route the range is 1 255 the default value is 110 dist3 The administration distance of the external route the range is 1 255 the default value is 150 Default status not configured adopt the default value Prevent Flooding LSA on Interface By default OSPF floods new LSA to all interfaces in a same area the interface which receives the LSA are excluded Although there are some redundant processes it is favorable to the synchronization of database However if the redundant processes are too many for example in a fully connected network topology they then waste the bandwidth and occupy the CUP resources and may affect the network On the broadcast NBMA and point to point networks the following command can be configured to prevent the flooding of LSA on the given interface The command database filter all out Configure the command on an interface to prevent LSA from being flooded to the interface ip ospf ip addr database filter all out
124. capability dynamic orf prefix list lt both receive send route refresh Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group dynamic Specify the neighbor to support dynamic capability orf Specify the neighbor to support orf capability pref ix list Specify the prefix list based orf capability both Notify the neighbor of being willing to receive and send prefix list based orf receive Notify the neighbor of being willing to receive prefix list based orf send Notify the neighbor of being willing to send prefix list based orf route refresh Specify the neighbor to support the capability of updating the route neighbor shutdown command The command is used to close the connection with a BGP neighbor or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to Enable connection with the neighbor neighbor neighbor address group name shutdown no neighbor neighbor address group name shutdown Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group neighbor soft reconfiguration inbound command The command is used to configure BGP peer entity or peer entity group to Support input soft re configuration function The peer entity or peer entity group begins to store the received original route The no form of the command means not to store the received original route Maipu Confidential
125. cceed only if the calling user supports H450 3 or Q 931 Facility call forwarding mode when using H 323 protocol or supports SIP protocol Standard divert procedure when using SIP protocol For call divert based on H323 protocol or SIP protocol the calling Router can perform calling without router configuration if the message received by Router contains IP address of user diverted Otherwise router configuration is necessary Call divert configuration can be realized by connecting to phone on equipment See details in the following table Call Divert Service Description Code 40 number Set number to be diverted for Call Forwarding Busy CFB 41 number Set number to be diverted for Call Forwarding No Reply CFNR 57 number Set number to be diverted for Call Forwarding Unconditional CFU 40 number Inquire whether number to be diverted has been set for Call Forwarding Busy CFB 41 number Inquire whether number to be diverted has been set for Call Forwarding No Reply CFNR 57 number Inquire whether number to be diverted has been set for Call Forwarding Unconditional CFU 40 Cancel Call Forwarding Busy CFB 41 Cancel Call Forwarding No Reply CFNR 5 Cancel Call Forwarding Unconditional CFU Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 69 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 For example Provided that user has right to use Call Divert the user can set
126. ce bandwidth is 100M the interface bandwidth value is determined by the command bandwidth in Interface Configuration Mode The following command can be used to modify the reference bandwidth The command auto cost reference bandwidth This command modifies the reference bandwidth value for calculating the OSPF cost The no format of the command can be used to recover to the default reference bandwidth The default reference bandwidth for calculating cost is 100M auto cost reference bandwidth ref bandwidth no auto cost reference bandwidth Syntax Description The reference bandwidth value for calculating OSPF cost the range is 1 4294967 Default status not configured adopt the default value ref bandwidth Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 166 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Configure Administration Distance of OSPF The administration distance indicates the reliability of the route source or the priority It is usually an integer among the range of 0 255 the value is bigger the reliability is lower the priority is lower OSPF uses three different administration distances the intra area route the inter area route and the external route The default administration distances of the intra area route and inter area route are 110 the default administration distance of the external route is 150 The command distance This command configures the administration distance of OSPF route users
127. ces to modify the configurations Or click Exit to drop all the configurations If performing sub interface bridging WAN address needs to be configured on the VoIP sub interface and the VoIP protocol stack needs to be configured on the VoIP sub interface If you need to delete fO and sw0O addresses perform the deletions in shell Before the deletion confirm that you can log in to the device via other address Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 32 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 VLAN Configuration VLAN configuration interface in WAN QMlaniee vlan Aa lan ID aceakeO AHAYVLAN aCe 1 fastethernetO 1 false G x aie fis Click New to create a new interface and VLAN configuration information The configuration interface is lan ID vlan ID 38H 1 4094 abn eO fastethernet0 1 AHAVLAN a Vian ID It is the ID of a VLAN Configure the interface The sub interface receiving the data of the above defined VLAN Local VLAN If the data received by a physical interface does not have tag give it to the sub interface configured with native local VLAN to process Click Set to create a configuration You can click the icon after an existing VLAN to enter the VLAN configuration interface for editing the configuration Click to delete a configuration DDNS Configuration DDNS is short for Dynamic Domain Name Server DDNS maps the dynamic IP address of the user to a fixed do
128. ch and then press 1 to switch to original communication Press hook switch and then press 2 to switch to new communication Note If a number is configured with Call Divert service first delete it from the Call Divert service and then you can configure Call Wait service If a number is configured with the Call Wait service first you do not need to delete the Call Wait service before configuring the Call Divert service The gateway can use Call Divert service first according to the service priority Call Pickup Configuration Call pickup means that when the phone of the called user A rings user B hopes to answer the call of user A by performing some operation on its own phone when user B answers the call the phone of user A stops ringing The gateway can configure call pickup group The dialing mode for call pickup of users in the group is different from that of the users that are not in the group Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 71 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 1 User A and user B belong to a call pickup group User B picks up the phone and dials 71 or dialing 71 times out that is user B does not need to dial the phone number of user A to answer the call of user A 2 User A and User B do not belong to a call pickup group User B picks up the phone and dials 71 the phone number of user A or dialing 71 the phone number of user A times out Note In the above two points
129. config if loopback0 interface s1 0 RouterB config if seriall 0 encapsulation hdlc RouterB config if seriall 0 ip address 192 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 RouterB config if seriall 0 clock rate 9600 RouterB config if seriall 0 interface s2 0 RouterB config if serial2 0 encapsulation hdlc RouterB config if serial2 0 ip address 193 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterB config if serial2 0 clock rate 9600 RouterB config if serial2 0 exit RouterB config router bgp 200 RouterB config bgp neighbor 192 1 1 1 remote as 100 RouterB config bgp neighbor 193 1 1 2 remote as 200 RouterB config bgp neighbor 193 1 1 2 next hop self RouterB config bgp exit RouterC configuration Command Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Description Enter the Global Configuration Mode Enter the loopback interface Configure the IP address Enter the interface s1 0 Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC Configure the IP address Enter the BGP Configuration Mode Specify AS number of the BGP peer entity Configure the network to which the BGP is sent Description Enter the Global Configuration Mode Enter the loopback interface Configure the IP address Enter the interface s1 0 Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC Configure clock Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC Enter BGP Configuration Mode Specify AS number of BGP neighbor Specify AS number of BGP neighbor Set its own address as the next hop D
130. configuration automatically when the device started tick it to get the initiation configuration automatically when the device started Click Get configuration to gain VPN initial configuration from central server configured Tunnel Configuration Check the basic information of the tunnel on the following interface i Tunnel Configuration aa El Name of Tunnel tunne 0O Local gateway dialer Destination Gateway any Gx name of protococ Local Source Destination destination z Type Type Delete policy type SubNet Host Port SubNet Host Port policy ip 19 7 168 16 0 24 any Subnet 197 168 17 0 24 any Subnet amp Create a Tunnel Click the Create a Tunnel button to create a tunnel which will be used to protect the dataflow between two gateways Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 85 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 System only displays a table titled Create a Tunnel if there is not tunnel One table stands for one tunnel with a header to display basic information of tunnel The body of table displays basic information of tunnel policy Press or to unfold or fold the table It is fold mode if no policy in tunnel Click to configure corresponding tunnel and press in header to delete all configuration of corresponding tunnel including all policies that use this tunnel Press in body to delete corresponding policy Please refer to section 3 6 3 for policy configuration Click Create a Tun
131. configure the RIP version The configurations of Router A and Router B are the same as 4 2 3 1 Router C recceives RIP updating packets from Router A and learns RIP routes If users hope that Router A only sends RIP updating to Router B they can combine the passive interface and unicast neighbor to use Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 142 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The configuration of Router A Command Description router A configure terminal To enter Global Configuration Mode router A config interface gigaethernetO To enter the gO interface router A config if gigaethernetO ip address 20 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip address router A config if gigaethernetO interface gigaethernetl To enter the g1 interface router A config if gigaethernet1 ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip address router A config if gigaethernet1 exit To return to Global Configuration Mode router A config router rip To enter the RIP Configuration Mode router A config rip network 20 0 0 0 To specify the network number run by RIP router A config rip network 10 0 0 0 Same as above router A config rip version 2 To configure the RIP version router A config rip passive interface gigaethernetl To Set g1 as the passive interface router A config rip neighbor 10 1 1 2 To specify 10 1 1 2 as a unicast neighbor Hereafter router A only updates packets to 10 1 1 2 in the form of
132. configure the VoIP route of the peer gateway Click the VoIP Config tab and click Add to display following interface i Call route config kes VOIP dial peer configuration Index 3 Range 1 100 2006 Route phone number matching rule can configure completely phone Phone number number matching or prefix phone number matching Use x present for a digit use present for any digits of any length e g 028x present for any number that match prefix 028 Peer gateway Target 128 255 16 97 Route priority 10 v Priority decreases as the digit increase Encode e729 The preferred voice codec when making a IP call over this dial peer Default g729 Called wl Apply index of transform rule to called number Calling m Apply number transform to calling number Fax 5 Configure the fax capability of the dial peer Backup Hone v A VOIP dial peer call route with dial peer number as 3 is configured in the above figure Route target is a MP2000 104B router whose IP address is 128 255 16 97 A phone 2008 is configured for this gateway We can perform configuration for other gateways and VoIP routes of IP phones by the method above When configuring phone number of peer gateway the user can match it with x For example six phone numbers 2000 2015 are configured in router 128 255 16 97 Now we need to configure routes of these sixteen numbers in MP2000 104B router Follow the steps
133. cription lp address Can individually specify the hello interval of an address on the OSPF interface hello interval Hello packet interval time the unit is second the range is 1 65535 Default status not configured adopt the default value The command tp ospf dead interval This command configures the dead time of the neighbor the unit the second If an OSPF router has not received the hello packet of the neighbor router after waiting for such a period the neighbor is regarded as down The default value is four times of the hello time the default hello time depends on the network type ip ospf ip address dead interval dead interval no ip ospf ip address dead interval Syntax Description lp address Can individually specify the dead interval of an address on the OSPF interface dead interval The dead time of the neighbor the unit is second the range is 1 65535 Default status not configured adopt the default value Note After the hello interval time is modified if the dead time is the default value four times of the hello time then the corresponding dead time interval is modified But if the dead time is not the default value not four times of the hello time modifying hello time interval doesn t affect the dead time Modifying the dead time doesn t affect the hello interval time The command tp ospf mtu This command configures the maximum transmission unit of the interface When encapsulating OSPF packets
134. d is used to configure the TCP port number used by the BGP protocol of BGP peer entity The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 198 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 neighbor neighbor address port num no neighbor neighbor address port num Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity num The port number of the neighbor peer end The value range is 0 65535 Default status The default value is TCP179 port neighbor maximum prefix command The command is used to configure the maximum number of route prefixes that can be received from BGP per entity or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address peer _group name maximum prefix num threshold value warning only no neighbor neighbor address peer_group name maximum prefix num warning only Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity peer_group name The name of the peer entity group num The number of route The value range is 1 4294967295 warning only Only warning but not stop receiving routes threshold value The threshold The value range is 1 100 neighbor weight command The command is used to configure the default weight of the peer entity or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor
135. ddress The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group access list name The name of the access list in Configure the access list to function on the route notified from the neighbor out Configure the access list to function in the route notified to the neighbor Default status By default it is disabled neighbor filter list command The command is used to configure the AS_PATH attribute filtering list about BGP route applied on BGP peer entity or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address group name filter list aspath list name lt in out no neighbor neighbor address group name filter list access list name in out Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 195 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group aspath list name AS list number in Configure the AS number filtering list to function on the route notified from the neighbor out Configure the AS number filtering list to function on the route notified to the neighbor Default status By default it is disabled neighbor prefix list command The command is used to configure the prefix filtering list applied on the BGP peer entity or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighb
136. e which can control a router send the route updating by unicast aiming at some neighbors but not update routes by broadcast RIPv2 is multicast for all neighbor routers on the interface The command recv buffer size This command configures the buffer size for RIP receiving packets This command is to resolve the packet loss problem when a high speed interface sending RIP protocol packets to a low speed interface The no format of the command is to recover the buffer size for RIP receiving packets to the default value recv buffer size buf size no recv buffer size buf size Syntax Description buf size To configure the value of the buffer size for RIP receiving packets The unit is byte and the value range is 41600 5242880 Default status buf size 41600bytes the default buffer size for UDP socket receiving packets Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode The command redistribute This command configures to redistribute routes of other protocols in RIP The no format can be used to cancel the redistribution redistribute bgp connected ospf process id static metric metric route map route map name no redistribute bgp connected ospf process id static Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 130 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Syntax Description bgp To configure to redistribute routes of BGP protocol in RIP connected To configure to redistribute the direct connected ro
137. e If the user needs to restart the device click Restart Device When the user confirms to restart the device the web prompts the user whether to save the current configuration To make the configuration after restarting the device is consistent with the current configuration it is recommended that the user saves the current device configuration Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 233 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 IOS files are the application program of the device including device program web network management program and DDNS module Upgrade Program via Masterplan For the installation and use of Masterplan please refer to the user manual Here only the new auto upgrade programs and the related functions in Masterplan are described Manage Device Program Files This part adds the upgrade packet in directory format The other functions are the same as those of the versions before MP5 The upgrade packets should be organized according to the following format The outer folder name is not always release and it can be named as others B release OS Mp2000 104B 8 0 21 bin B Ext iVr Welcome 723 Welcome 729 ringback 729 timeout 729 appct appcd CW appUc 0 723 3 729 1 729 xing 723 D H H E OS Includes a bin file Ext Includes all the voice files of directory structure the directory corresponds with the correct structure relationship of the voice files in FLASH
138. e specified routing protocol into the OSPF routing area can specify the cost the cost type the route tag and the route map mapping for the route To Set time for refreshing timer To set a fixed Router ID for the router To summarize the external routes of ospf The spf calculating delay and the time for restraining calculation config ospf config ospf config ospf config ospf config ospf config ospf config ospf config ospf config ospf config ospf config ospf config ospf config ospf config ospf config ospf config ospf config ospf Page 152 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Description of Commands for Configuring OSPF Area Command Description Config mode To configure OSPF area as the plain text config ospf area area id authentication we authentication area area id authentication To configure OSPF area as the MD5 config ospf message digest authentication To Set cost of the default route of stub or NSSA config ospf area area id default cost cost Brea value area area id filter list access ABR router filters with in out direction by using config ospf access name prefix prefix the access list or the prefix list when it name in out advertising the type3 LSA to other areas area area id nssa default config ospf information originate metric metric value metric type type To set an area as nssa area the sub command value can specify th
139. e PPP protocol In order to make routeri connect with router3 the configuration of running OSPF dynamic routing protocol is Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 172 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The a of router 1 Command Description router 1 config router ospf 1 To set up OSPF process router 1 config ospf network 70 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 To specify the corresponding OSPF interface and the area it belongs to router 1 config int fastethernetO router 1 config if fastethernet0O address 70 1 1 1 To configure the interface address 255 255 255 0 router 1 config if fastethernet0 exit Be The configuration of router 2 Command Command scription router 2 config router ospf 1 To set up OSPF process router 2 config ospf network 70 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 To specify the corresponding OSPF interface and the area it belongs to router 2 config ospf network 30 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 area 1 To specify the corresponding OSPF interface and the area it belongs to router 2 config ospf exit router 2 config interface serial0 0 Be router 2 config if serial0 0 physical layer sync router 2 config if serial0 0 clock rate 19200 a router 2 config if serial0 0 encapsulation ppp To encapsulate PPP router 2 config if serial0 0 ip address 30 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 To configure the interface address router 2 config if serial0 0 exit router 2 config int fastethernet0 router
140. e RIP to send RIP version 1 and version 2 packets at the same time on the interface which means to respectively send an updating packets with two versions 12 To configure RIP to send RIP version 2 packets in the form of broadcast on the interface 1 compatible To configure RIP to send RIP version 2 packets in the form of broadcast on the interface Default status send packets according to the RIP global version Command mode Interface Configuration Mode Note The command doesn t affect sending unicast packets to neighbor The command Ip rip send packet This command configures RIP to enable sending packets on the interface The no format of the command can be used to disable sending RIP packets on the interface ip rip send packet no ip rip send packet Default status enable sending RIP packets on the interface Command mode Interface Configuration Mode The command ip split horizon This command configures RIP to enable split horizon or poisoned reverse on an interface The split horizon and poisoned reverse only take effect for the learned routes the direct routes of the networks covered by RIP the redistributed direct and static routes The no format of the command can be used to cancel the function ip split horizon poisoned no ip split horizon Syntax Description poisoned To Enable poisoned reverse Default status Enable poisoned reverse Command mode Interface Configuration Mode Maipu Confidential amp
141. e Virtual link is identified by the router id of the peer router e The two peer routers configured with the virtual link have to be in a same public area called virtual link transit area e Virtual link can be regarded as a part of the backbone it can be regarded as the unnumbered point to point network Its cost is the spending of this link and the cost cannot be configured e Each virtual link is identified uniquely via the transit area and the peer router id of the virtual link e The command no area virtual link can be used to cancel the configuration of the virtual link e Virtual link cannot be configured via stub or nssa area which means the transit area of the virtual link cannot be stub or nssa area Configure Demand Circuit The demand circuit is the network that the cost varies according to using the cost is based on the link time and the transmitted packets The typical demand circuits include ISDN circuit X 25SVC and dial up circuit The lower layer data link of the earlier OSPF is always enabled which causes Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 164 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 some unnecessary costs after the demand circuit function is added the hello packets and routing updating information of OSPF are restrained on the demand circuit When no data is being transmitted the lower layer data link is permitted to disable On the demand circuit the hello packets and LSAs are only
142. e debug information switches of BGP events keepalive Enable debug information switches of BGP keepalive updates Enable debug information switches of BGP routes out Enable output route debug information switches in Enable intput route debug information switches dampening Enable debug information switches of BGP route suppression filters Enable debug information switches of BGP route filtering fsm Enable debug information switches of BGP finite state machine normal Enable debug information switches of BGP timers Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 226 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Upgrade Device Software Upgrade Via shell Upgrade bin Files of Monitor Program via sysupdate Step 1 Run and set TFTP FTP server Use Maipu TFTP server CISCO TFIP or other TFITP FIP server The following takes Maipu TFTP as an example to describe Open Maipu TFTP server and click Option on the tools bar to display following interface Set Public Path as the directory where the program to be upgraded is located set server IP address as the PC address set server port as TFTP service port 69 the other parameters adopt the default values Click OK to close the Option interface and return to the main interface MaiPu TFTP Server Client 128 255 32 ioj x TD M El A Bc aa e rep ey wee iE IMO A BR Ai AF A ies Bas Mo ear gE Be ae TERS feet Iz nprouter_mp2600_edition _daeiesoe yit
143. e in the whole network Loca l sign is constrained if the local ip address generated dynamic Name of Tunnel and level of security are defined by the user Choose share previously for authentication mode Fill secret key negotiated with destination The address of destination gateway is IP address of VPN Server Leave sign blank Choose dialerO as local out interface namely the out interface in PPPOE configuration Sign is defined by the user Click Apply to create a tunnel For communication with business center it requires to create policy Enter policy configuration interface to create a policy Policy settings Set policy Click the Create a policy button to create a new policy Create a policy Enter the policy configuration interface to configure parameters Policy settings Policy name Protocol P Local subnet host IP address 192 168 16 0 Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet v Destination subnet host IP address 16 0 0 0 Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet v Apply to tunnel0 vw tunnel Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information e g Market department to financial department e g 255 255 255 0 or the number of bits of mask 24 e g 255 255 255 0 or the number of bits of mask 24 Page 97 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Policy name is defined by user Choose IP as protocol and subnet for local Namely the users in MP2000 104B Rou
144. e of WAN link Line PRI It realizes route forwarding by configuring management distance of default route The combination application realizes line backup Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 27 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 PPPOE Dial up Line This option indicates PPPOE dial up to internet Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN PPPoE Dial up Line Please enter your account and password Username admin Password e Username It is provided by ISP The user can get if from ISP Password It is provided by ISP The user can get if from ISP PPPOE takes default auto dial mode Before using this function the user has to apply for ADSL service from Telecommunication Office so as to get username and password for accessing WAN To provide PC under LAN port with access to internet the user needs to set PC address as the one in the same network segment of MP2000 104B Router intranet port At the same time the address of intranet should be the default gateway of PC Ethernet Dynamic Address Line This option indicates that the user should get and configure the IP address subnet mask NDS and default gateway of MP2000 104B Router external network port via DHCP Client Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 28 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 WAN Interface Information The user can check current WAN configuration and connection information of MP2000 104B via
145. e parameter as NSSA area no redistribution no generating the default route do not distribute the summary translate external routes do no distribute summary LSA always translate and specify the role of NSSA area ABR when candidate translate translating type 7 LSA to type 5 LSA never translator role always candidate never nter area route summarization to perform the config ospf amalgamated calculation and route summarization in the area border can choose to advertise not advertise and advertise the replaced route area area_id range prefix range advertise not advertise area area id Shortcut To configure the action mode of the area border config ospf default disable enable router as shortcut area area id stub no summary To configure OSPF area as the stub area config ospf area transit area id virtual link config ospf address authentication To configure the virtual link passing the transit area to the backbone area Users can configure the interface parameters for the interface of the virtual link The meaning of the interface parameter is consistent with the meaning of the message digest null hello interval seconds retransmit interval seconds transmit delay seconds dead interval seconds authentication key key message digest key key id md5 normal OSPF interface key Description of Commands for Configuring OSPF Interface Command Description Config mode To configure the
146. e with the latest version number of this kind of devices on the network management system If finding that the version number on the network management system is newer the device is discovered as the device to be upgraded and is added to the list of the devices to be upgraded As shown in the following figure one MP2000 104B is added to the list DeABLSeH HHREGEB EMAAR SS SEA ALLER MESES L eh PEt HE Repeal hei SRI LJ MP2000 104B AC 1 28 255 16 103 Wea mp2000 1045 eee T MP2000_1048 128 255 16 55 mp2000 104B8 mp2000 104B8 8 0 43 L07 g BEF ER ES LN allen CF FLAC Manage Upgrade Tasks Open Configuration management Auto Upgrade Management Upgrade Task Management Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 236 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 OFS ee FHS SH Se SES aT AHS a an 2e ORAA PHH REAM REE SRE HERRE HE FERMIS Tren FRET Bb EE HENARE ER FIMES A SESE MRES D Add a upgrade task Click Add Task on the upgrade task management interface to display following interface SEMA _ x Ft AES A EMMIS HR SSM Wy 885 IPH GEEN FeRzeR Heme FRAT IA FRAP KB SHES BBS MP2000 128 255 16 mp2000 1 0 FEA 2008 3 3 14 26 45 fd FTP e J MP2000 128 255 16 mp2000 10 SER i 2008 3 3 14 28 45 fd FTP afd azo RHO Select tick the check box at the left and the check
147. ea according to the function of the access list only takes effect on ASBR router distribute list access list number access list name out routing protocol process id no distribute list access list number access list name out routing protocol process id Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 170 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Syntax Description access list number The standard access list number the range is 1 1000 access list nam The standard access list name routing protoco The routing protocol to be filtered The process number of the routing protocol some protocols process id are not distinguished by the protocol number Default status not configured The area filter list ABR router can use the access list or the prefix list to filter with in out direction when receiving and advertising the type 3 LSA area area id filter list access access name prefix prefix name in out no area area id filter list access access name prefix prefix name in out Syntax Description l The id number of the area receiving or advertising the type 3 area id LSA access name The applied access list name prefix name The applied prefix list name in To filter when the area is receiving the type 3 LSA ak To filter when the area is advertising the type 3 LSA to other areas Default status not configured Control the process of route updating When adding routes into the forwarding
148. ection messages The fax quality can be improved by increasing the value when the network is in the bad state and there is packet loss Fax pass through Code transparent transmission mode is required for encrypted fax Transparent transmission indicated that gateway encapsulate and transmit signaling and data to opposite gateway transparently by lossless compression coding rather than understands thoroughly the signaling and data of fax The losses code modes supported by gateways are G 711A G 711U and G 726 Transparent transmission Should be based on same gateway code mode set in two gateways Enable Error Check Mode of T38 fax It takes effect only when the electrographs of the two sides have the ECM function Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 81 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Other Configurations The following figure illustrates other VoIP service configurations Other services configuration Other services configuration FSK mode BELL202 mode v Default BELL202 mode 9 DTMF signal gain Unit dbm Range 1dbm 20dbm Default 9dbm Don t change this if not necessary Voice data TOS Preference sending mode x Using preference sending mode by default E E If the calling number start with a header as the same as this code the header will be discarded before displaying onto the local phones 10 Unit minute Range 1 1440 Default 10 Null means di
149. ed port can be sent to mirror port so as to realize the function that equipments in mirror port can monitor input and output data of mirrored port Port mirror The mirrored port The mirrored port Choose input output of one Monitored Port Port ID Input Check all cancel 0 1 2 3 Apply Enable Port Mirror ee Mirror Port port connected to monitoring equipment Mirrored Port port monitored by monitoring equipment Input tick it to monitor input data of mirrored port Output tick it to monitor output data of mirrored port Check All Cancel tick it to perform monitoring or cancel monitoring of input and output data of mirrored port When port mirror function is disabled please click Enable Port Mirror displayed on the interface to start port mirror function when port mirror function is enabled click Disable Port Mirror to cancel port mirror function When the user performs configuration for some mirror port and its corresponding mirrored port the relative configuration detail is displayed in this page In addition the configured mirrored port will be displayed by ticking original mirror port When some port is adopted as mirror port it is disabled in mirrored port configuration The terms mentioned above are subject to router mode Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 43 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Switch Port Configuration The section explains port configuration and port
150. efault The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration bgp default ipv4 unicast no bgp default ipv4 unicast Default status By default the functions are enabled bgp dampening command The command is used to configure the BGP route suppression and the parameters The no form of the command is used to cancel the route Suppression bgp dampening reach_half life reuse_value Suppress value max Suppress time un_reach_half life route map map_name no bgp dampening route map map_name Syntax Description reach_ half life The half life of the BGP route suppression The value range is 1 45 reuse value The re used value when the routing begins The value range is 1 20000 Suppress value The suppression value when the routing begins The value range is 1 20000 max suppress time The maximum suppression time of the route The value range is 1 255 un_reach_ half life The un reachable half life punished by the route The value range is 1 45 minutes map_name Use the specified route map to Set parameter Default status By default half life is 15minutes resue is 750 suppress is 2000 and max suppress time is the 4multiples of half life Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 206 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 bgp deterministic med command The command is used to configure BGP to select the best MED routes received by each AS to compare The no form of the command is used
151. efer to the section of Device Software Upgrade The above two operations are to make the device can be powered on and work normally again when the system is abnormal Use the reset button and after the system is powered on the original configuration files are deleted so the services need to be re configured and saved Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 118 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Shell Configuration Guide Configure Router via Telnet If the router is configured with the IP addresses of the interfaces you can use Telnet to log in to the router via the LAN or WAN and configure the router Configure the router via LAN Ac APC fF AC FA as E 00 MD a gt a Configure the router via LAN Connect the network interface of the PC to the Ethernet interface of the router Run the application program of the Telnet client on a PC of the LAN Set Telnet Terminal Preferred Options The set content Terminal gt Preferred Options gt Analog Options and set it as VT100 ANSI St virgo LM PRALE C EHR E fe AERC E C WT 52 HA EREJET IL VI E vioo 04 VT 100 AHSI Eb an SEPIA AL SI 25 CE AAA CK Configure terminal preferred options Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 119 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 When configuring Telnet client program you should cancel the Local Response echo option Otherwise the
152. eiecaecssdenipovers 150 OSPF Dynamic Routing COMTIGQUISTION sicesesscecnwevewnrevrieverevverereseeraradatacctacctacsiacsteeses 150 Brief Introduction to OSPF ProtOCo lse siti smn c peta ducnya a aN aa aaa 150 Description of OSPF Basic Commands siscinatescansdatawcudstadecde hidsicd a hihedauieunsiivuavasncidubedianhedeandenidest 151 Description of Commands for Configuring OSPF s ss sssssssssssssssssrnrnrsrnnrsnnnnnnnrennnrnnnnennnrnrnnenenne 154 Montor g Depug OSPR issa E E 181 conng re BOP ID Viele ROUTO ceteis cas cacccneccaecenteacnesnnen ace aaa 182 BGP Configuration Commands drcnss cnatendeuedensassessnnt suas ne E E En 183 BGP CONNU aton occ ga 0 lt lt isson E E E L E 214 BGP Monitoring amp Debugging s sssssssssnssnansrsnnnnsnnnrannnsnnnrnnnnsnsnnnnnnsasnnsnnnrannnnnnnrannnsunnnnnnnnann 223 Upgrade Device Software cscsssscscsesesssseceeenenenesensssececsnssesessssssesensnenses DOT Diealgcs Reo e AE 227 Upgrade bin Files of Monitor Program via sysupdate s sssssssssssrsrsrrsrsrrnrnrersnrnrnnsrenrnrnrerenne 227 Upgrade the bin Files of Application Program Via sysupdate ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeaeeeeeeeaees 229 Upgrade bin Files of Application Program via live update Breakpoint Transmission 6 231 Upgrade Program via Web ssssssssssssssssssosnsernnssnssrnusrnssrnesnnornnernunenunrnesrnernneennee 233 Upgrade Program via Masterplan s sssssssssssssrnssnnsnnnrnsnnsrnsrner
153. eing upgraded task cannot be deleted Advanced Configuration of Auto Upgrade Open Configuration Management Auto Upgrade Management gt Advanced Configuration to display following interface On the interface you can Set check period of discovering the devices to be upgraded The value range is 10 1440 minutes The default value is 60 minutes On the interface you can configure the FTP service parameters There are two configurations including 1 Connect up to ten and the downloading rate is not limited 2 Connect up to 100 and the maximum rate is 64KB s Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 239 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 rare Ut oe EHA Baba eed ve ee Ball EA E FT Pa S ae SA E a Baht lille E ENR R eo Bll EEH 10 Ht Fit FA CA FT PAR So ee Abs 2 21 8c E BAER Fe RE ATG4AKB s z Fit FAP Update Troubleshooting Methods for Irregular System If the device becomes abnormal and cannot be powered on you can adopt the Monitor FTP to upgrade the device program If SYS light is always on and INUSE light flashes for about 2 minutes and restarts after system is powered on for a period of time 1 minute it indicates that application program cannot be started In other word the application program of FLASH may be destroyed In such case the user should apply FTP loading application program First set username and password of FTP server as admin and admin and then set IP addres
154. enter the RIP Configuration Mode Page 139 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 router B config rip network 10 0 0 0 router B config rip version 2 To configure the RIP version router B config rip distribute list 10 in e0 To use the access list on the e0 Run the command show ip rotue rip on Router B there is no RIP route 20 1 1 0 24 RIP Load Balance Configuration g0 20 1 1 1 24 g0 20 1 1 3 24 router A router C gl 10 1 1 1 24 gl 10 1 1 3 24 e0 10 1 1 224 router B In the network topology figure 4 6 Router B can get to LAN via Router A or Router C The configurations of Router A and Router B are the same as 4 2 3 1 The configuration of Router C router C configure terminal To enter Global Configuration Mode router C config interface gigaethernet0 To enter the g0 interface router C config if gigaethernet0 ip address 20 1 1 3 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip address router C config if gigaethernet0 interface gigaethernet1 To enter the g1 interface router C config if gigaethernet1 ip address 10 1 1 3 255 255 255 0 To To configure the ip address the i To configure the ip address address router C config if gigaethernet1 exit To return to Global Configuration Mode router C config router rip To enter the RIP Configuration Mode router C config rip network 20 0 0 0 To specify the network number run by RIP router C config rip network 10 0 0 0 Same as above router C
155. entity group to be used for matching the route map of suppression route Configure Site of Origin in extended community attributes of BGP peer entity Configure the AS number cover of BGP peer entity or peer entity group config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp config bgp af config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp af Here the config bgp af Page 186 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode bgp enforce first as Configure the first AS number in AS_PATH config bgp attributes of the BGP route information received from EBGP neighbor should be the AS number of the neighbor bgp fast external failover Configure the straight through EBGP neighbor config bgp to shut down the EBGP connection at once when the connected interface is down bgp bestpath as path ignore Configure the policy for selecting route of BGP config bgp compare routerid comp
156. er Attention it is feasible under VOIP dial port only Note The user can configure fax capability under VOIP port only It is invalid under other dial ports Only if gateway is configured as enable Router T38 fax and VOIP dial port has corresponding fax capability such as T38 or Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 80 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 transparent fax the gateway gives priority to fax capability under dial port T38 Fax Mode On the premise of T38 capability encapsulation mode of T38 ASN 1 IFP packet includes UDPTL mode and RTP mode For RTP encapsulation the user is required to configure the same parameter for PT payload type field default is 98 in RTP heads of two ends The payload type used by RTP fax mode cannot be the same as the dynamic payload type used by 2833 protocol Maximal Speed Unit kbps default 14 4kbps The fax speed is used to control maximal speed of fax that is the fax negotiates from the configured maximum speed High Redundancy It is the number of the redundant packets in T38 high speed data When the fax is seriously distorted it is the times of re transmitting fax packets The fax quality can be improved by increasing the value when the network is in the bad state and there is packet loss Low Redundancy It is the number of the redundant packets in T38 low speed data When the fax is cannot be connected it is the times of re transmitting T38 conn
157. es 77 Fax Service Configuration Mee en oinnia A eee 80 Oter OMG MralOnS arasnda a eE E a i 82 VENG ONT I Oa EE EE O 85 VPN Initial COMMOUEAMION isoen an aa aai 85 TSG AT Ie TOI srna E 85 PONCY COMMU AMO Miaruntuccmentsessueuersumtesbonemasetennestecater EE E E E E E ENEE D 88 Certincate Config ratigi geen meer ener ree mene nen Ea EAEE ee ere 91 VIW Status TROUT CON cesena n a A i E 93 Configuration EX AIM PICS ss sneweceanctenccctucataaterunsanetiecesetauecnntensintavoraannnetoaniasosidencseteunonntenseceamentns 94 ROURC G OMe lato h iaiininaa aa eanenenenenmaunsusescecucuenenen 99 Static Route Connourat O MD aiee a pen eneedoeauaiaatauctedecnepsteaeneteadnoonbencoaeser 99 Access List aU CIR cara cpa cae erea E E A EEE i EE A ERSO 100 DHCP Service Configuration sssssssssssnssnnnsrennnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnrannnennnnnnnnsasnnsnnnrannnsnnnrannnsnnnnnnnnnann 102 Static Address Translation Configuration s sssssssssssrsrsrrrrsrsnnnrsrnnnnrnronnnrnnnnennnnnnnnenennnnnnenena 104 Dynamic Address Translation Configuration s ss ssssssssssersrsrrnrsrsrrnrnnsrsnnnrnnnnnnrnrenenrnnnnenenenne 107 NAT Translation Parameter Configuration ccc ccscseecsesecceesseceeeseseesaeeseseeesneoesonsonsoessnsonesees 108 Flux Dynamic amp L3 Throughput Limit Configuration tics cacin sec ceteeatncctendedivaveeninnvnwecesubnenmtenansdein 108 Sub Interface CONPIQUIATION cccccececeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesnsnsncneneecneeaeeeseseeeenesesesnens 109
158. es Fixed Address Line as example to perform configuration Tick Fixed Address Line and then click Next to enter the interface Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN Fixed Address Line Please enter the IP address got from the ISP Interface WAN lind IP address 128 255 16 94 The IP addrees it is usually apprized by the line provider e g 202 10 68 69 Subnet 205 255 254 0 The subnet mask it is usually apprized by the line provider g 255 255 255 0 The default Gateway 128 255 19 264 Configure the IP address of the default gateway of the Static Address Line here This parameter ts usually apprized by the line provider e g 702 10 68 60 Preferred DNS server 10 0 0 10 The preferred DNS address Alternate DNS server 10 0 0 11 The backup DNS address CO Gateway checking seconds Range is 0 32767 Default is interval 10s Line PRI gt High default Low In the figure above it sets WAN IP address of MP2000 104B router as 128 255 16 94 subnet mask as 255 255 252 0 and Router address as 128 255 19 254 WAN port configuration is complete here You can click WAN Configuration gt WAN port Connection information to view all WAN configuration information Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 245 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 QWAN Interface Information WAN Link Interface WAN Connection Type Fixed Address IP Address 128 255 16 94 Subnet Ma
159. escription Page 215 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 RouterC configure terminal Enter the Global Configuration Mode RouterC config interface loopback0 RouterC config if loopback0 ip address 3 3 3 3 259 255 255 255 RouterC config if loopback0 interface s2 0 RouterC config if serial2 0 encapsulation hdlc Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC RouterC config if serial2 0 ip address 193 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 RouterC config router bgp 200 Enter BGP Configuration Mode RouterC config bgp neighbor 193 1 1 1 remote as 200 Specify the autonomous number of BGP neighbor RouterC config bgp exit The above explains the dynamic routing protocol BGP About the configuration mode of the physical layer and link layer refer to related sections Example 2 The configuration of BGP route reflector L0 3 3 3 3 32 10 1 1 1 24 L0 2 2 2 2 32 a amp 192 1 1 1 24 k i 194 1 1 2 24 ROUTERA ROUTER D l j Mice ua AS200 Illustration The port S1 0 192 1 1 1 of Router A connects to the port S1 0 192 1 1 2 of Router B the port S2 0 193 1 1 1 of Router B connects to the port S2 0 193 1 1 2 of Router C RouterD s1 0 connects with the interface S1 0 of RouterC and their related addresses are 194 1 1 1 Router C and 194 1 1 2 Router D Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 216 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Router C acts as a reflector
160. escription of related commands for configuring OSPF Examples of configuring OSPF Monitoring and debugging of OSPF Brief Introduction to OSPF Protocol OSPF Open Shortest Path First is a link status based dynamic routing protocol which is used to calculate routes in the single Autonomous System short for AS The OSPF Version 2 realized by Maipu obeys rfc2328 and supports other OSPF extended functions defined by rfc such as NSSA rfc3101 The Supported main functions of OSPF are Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 150 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Stub Areas support the stub area function defined by rfc2328 Route Redistribution routes learned via any IP routing protocol can be redistributed to any other IP routing protocols In the intra area this indicates that OSPF can redistribute routes of RIP correspondingly routes of OSPF can be redistributed by RIP In the inter area this indicates that OSPF can redistribute routes of EGP and BGP of course routes of OSPF can be redistributed by EGP and BGP Authentication The plain text authentication and MD5 authentication are supported among the neighbor routers in an area OSPF interface parameter configuration can configure parameters on a interface for example the output charges the retransmitting interval time the transmitting delay time the priority the hello interval time the dead time of the neighbor and the a
161. ess Subnet Mask Tt is 255 255 255 0 by default MAC Address The MAC address of the intranet interface If it is null it means to recover the default value The user can log in only with new IP address after modifying local IP address The default gateway addresses of all computers in LAN should be the new IP address Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 40 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Voice Data Separation Configuration This function takes effect only in switch mode It is used to print voice data and user data with two different VLAN tags for programming upper network conveniently Its setting interface is shown as below voice data separate config voice data separate config user data marker please input VLAN ID range 1 4094 voice data marker please input VLAN ID range 1 4094 User data maker It is used to mark user data with Arabic numbers The value range is 1 4094 Voice data marker It is used to mark voice data with Arabic numbers The value range is 1 4094 Once this function is enabled voice data and user data flow sent by WAN interface are printed with different VLAN tags It takes effect in some networking mode In this network VLAN ID 2 is added to VoIP data on MP2000 1046B router while VLAN ID 3 is added to user data For the switch that MP2000 104B router is connected to port 1 belongs to VLAN3 and 2 port 2 to VLAN2 and port 3 to VLAN 3 The voice da
162. ess router A config if gigaethernetO interface gigaethernetl To enter the g1 interface router A config if gigaethernet1 ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip address router A config if gigaethernet1 exit To return to Global Configuration Mode router A config router rip To enter the RIP Configuration Mode router A config rip network 20 0 0 0 To specify the network number run by RIP router A config rip network 10 0 0 0 Same as above router A config rip version 2 To return to Global Configuration Mode router A config rip passive interface gigaethernet1l To Set g1 as the passive interface Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 141 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The configuration of Router B is the same as 4 2 3 1 Run the command show ip route rip on Router B we can find that there is no RIP route Enable debug ip rip event we can find the RIP updating packets sent by Router A will not be received RIP Unicast Neighbor Configuration Example g0 20 1 1 1 24 router A el 10 1 1 1 24 e0 10 1 1 2 24 router B e0 10 1 1 3 24 router C In the network topology figure 4 7 the configuration of Router c is router C config interface ethernetO router C config if ethernet0 ip address 10 1 1 3 255 255 255 0 router C config router rip To enter the RIP Configuration Mode router C config rip network 10 0 0 0 router C config rip version 2 To
163. ess cluster which does not affect the later commands address The address of the neighbor to be displayed advertised routes Display route information sent to the neighbor received routes Display original route information received from the neighbor pref ix filter Display prefix list based orf information received from the neighbor routes Display route information received from the neighbor show ip bgp summary command The command is used to display BGP and the summary information of the neighbor Show ip bgp ipv4 unicast multicast summary Syntax Description ipv4 unicast Display information about ipv4 unicast address cluster ipv4 multicast Display information about ipv4 multicast address cluster bgp rfc1771 path select command The command is used to configure the BGP protocol to select the route according to RFC1771 bgp rfc1771 path select bgp rfc1771 strict command Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 225 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The command is used to configure the BGP protocol to classify the ORIGIN attributes of the re distributed routes according to RFC1771 bgp rfc1771 strict debug ip bgp command The command is used to Enable debug information switch of the BGP packets debug ip bgp fall event keepalives updates out in dampening filters fsm normal Syntax Description all Enable all the debug information switches of BGP packets event Enabl
164. ess cluster and enter the configuration sub mode of the address cluster The no form of the command is used to cancel all the configurations of an address cluster address family ipv4 vrf vrfname multicast unicast no address family Syntax Description ipv4 ipv4 address cluster vrf Vrf address cluster multicast Multicast address cluster unicast Unicast address cluster vrfname Specify the vrf name network command The command is used to configure the route information of BGP notification The no form of the command is used to cancel the existing configuration network network number network mask route map map name backdoor backdoor no network network number network mask route map map name backdoor backdoor Syntax Description network number The network which BGP informs network mask The network mask which BGP informs route map The route mapping map name The name of the route mapping backdoor Configure the route as the backdoor route Default status None maximum paths command The command is used to configure BGP to support load balance The no form of the command is used to cancel the existing configuration maximum paths number ibgp number no maximum paths number ibgp number In IPv4 VRF configuration mode configure the BGP load balance The no form of the command is used to cancel the existing configuration maximum paths number eibgp number ibgp number unequal cost number
165. et phone number of connection plar in FXO port The call from FXO connects to connection plar directly so as to simplify second dial The connection plar refers to corresponding number in FXS port of this Router or refers to IVR accessing number of gateway or other numbers reached by gateway The number dialing from FXO port equals to connection plar dialing With IVR configured FXO will be connected to IVR number automatically and directly For FXO number dialing perform dial for the second time after IVR tone Bound number or voice port Set caller number bound to the FXO port or a FXS port When FXO port bounded is unavailable calling fails not seeking for other routers When FXO is bounded with caller number other numbers have no access to FXO port for calling The caller number bounded here refers to the one with wildcard x Support FXOFXS linkage When the number connected to the FXO port is one number of the FXS port on the gateway and dials in from FXO port the FXS port is connected If the FXS port is making a call with other user and there is a user dialing in from FXO port the call cannot be forwarded to the corresponding FXS port so the call hears busy tone as long as being connected This makes the caller pay a call by mistake To solve the problem when the FXS port picks up the phone control the FXO port to pick up the phone which make the external line cannot dial in from FXO port but other user can dial out from the F
166. etc e Take effective anti interference network measures for power supply system e Keep grounding fitting of power equipment or anti thunder grounding fitting far away from operating site of MP2000 104B Router e Keep it away from high power wireless launch pad radar launch pad and high frequency heavy current equipment e Adopt electromagnet shielding method etc if necessary Check Equipment amp Accessories After confirming that installation environment conforms to the standards you can un wrap the packing box Before standard installation you should check first MP2000 104B Router and its accessories carefully according to the purchase order Tools amp Equioment 1 Required tools Cross recessed screwdriver Glove anti static wrist 2 Cable in connecting cable fitting package 3 Required equipment Configuration Terminal Common PC is acceptable Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 12 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 system Installation Equipment Placement MP2000 104B Router can be placed directly on smooth and stable desk or other planes Overlapping is unhallowed Keep it away from sundries and fluid Leave MP2000 104B Router placed alone to guarantee immediate cooling and avoid fire disaster Interface Connection Finish equipment installation according to items mentioned above Confirm power supply is off Connect LAN amp WAN Ethernet Interfaces MP2000
167. ether to Enable function of dialing external line directly This function can be configured only when the corresponding port is enabled Direct outward dial delay The interval from picking up phone to dialing which is detected from FXS Hotline Dial Time if fxs port phone user always dials one called number e g reception he can set this number as hotline dial number in fxs port and set hotline dial wait time e g 2 seconds Then it performs automatic dialing 2 second later after off hook by fxs port user It simplifies repeated dialing If the user wants to dial other numbers he can dial it before wait time Otherwise system will automatically dial hotline number as the user sets The range of wait time is 2 5 seconds Hotline Dial Number please refer to Hotline Dial Time for setting hotline dial number The following figure illustrates Advanced configurations of voice port QWoice Port Config gt Advanced Advanced configurations of Voice port Port port to configure C Disable DSP input 0 Unit db Range 10 10 DSP output 0 Unit db Range 10 10 volume Default 0 volume Default 0 Max Tr Min JitterBuffer Unit ms Range 0 300 JitterBuffer Unit ms Range 0 255 Default 150 Default 35 delay delay Disable Default disable Reverse polarity Display the calling number Payload 2 Range 1 5 Default 2 VAD Delay dial Start with numbers and o end with commas for example 028
168. evice is not configured with user name and password for logging in to the web network management and MP5 does not Set default user name and password for logging in to the web network management the following interface is displayed to let the user select 1 Enter the interface of configuring the user name and password for logging in to the web network management 2 Log in to the web network management without any authentication parameters The login dialog box is displayed and the user can enter the homepage of the web network management after entering the user name and password manually SSS t t I gt FAP ASRS ERD F7FPVVE BP er Tie e A Peete User Name amp Password Management of Web NMS in Masterplan Select MP2000 104B device from the topology view right click and choose User name password management of WEB NMS to display following interface On the interface you can add default user name and password for logging in to the web of a device on the topology When using the web NMS the user name and password are introduced as authentication parameters to the web server After passing the authentication enter the homepage of web NMS directly If there are no such configurations the user needs to input user name and password manually when using the web NMS Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 113 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 WEBS PsSeee x ip Username pe desc Default admi
169. exceeds NAT connection number for a long time the system is in abnormal state The possible explanation is that PC is infected with computer virus or Trojan program WAN Interface Flow The information of WAN The name Rate of receive packet pps Rate of receive byte Kbps Rate of send packetfpps Rate of send byte Kbps Total rate Kbps WAN 2 1 9 1 1 9 3 9 On this interface you can check current WAN interface flow information including rate of receiving packet rate of receiving byte rate of sending packet rate of sending byte and total rate Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 36 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 LAN PC Network Running State The current network state there are only the first 50 entries if you want to see more record and the restrict of PC connection please click the More gt gt Sort by total connections Sort by total rate TCP UDP other sessions Rate of send Rate of send Rate of receive Rate of receive Total acket byte packet byte rate connections IP address p The number of connected pps KBps pps KBps KBps eae 192 168 0 110 2 0 0 0 0 40 2 4 On this interface you can check current PC network running state in LAN including PC name IP address rate of sending packet rate of sending byte rate of receiving packet rate of receiving byte and total rate and TCP UDP other sessions connections At the same time the user can choose Sort by total c
170. f config bgp config bgp af config bgp config bgp af Here the config bgp af configuration mode only refers to Pv4 vrf configuration sub mode config bgp config bgp af Page 184 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 neighbor neighbor address peer_group name shutdown neighbor neighbor address peer_group name soft reconfiguration inbound neighbor neighbor address peer_group name activate neighbor neighbor address peer_group name description string neighbor neighbor address num port neighbor neighbor address peer_group name maximum prefix num threshold value warning only neighbor neighbor address peer_group name weight num neighbor neighbor address peer_group name remove private AS neighbor neighbor address peer_group name default originate route map map name neighbor neighbor address peer_group name allowas in num Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Close the connection with a BGP neighbor or peer entity group Configure BGP peer entity or peer entity group to support input soft re configuration function Configure BGP peer entity or peer entity group to be activated in the local address cluster Configure the description of BGP peer entity or peer entity group Configure the TCP port number used by the BGP protocol of BGP peer entity Configure the maximum number of route prefixes that can be received
171. functions are already available when equipment is powered on for the first time The following items are brief introduction of various default configurations e All voice ports are in ENABLE state The port numbers of FXSO FXS1 FXS2 FXS3 and FXS4 are 401 402 403 404 The users can query the configured port numbers via 33 e When connecting phone exterior line to FXO port the user can get via PSTN Speed up accessing by finishing dialing with by previous dial up type If exterior line dials in the secondary dialing tone indicates operation once more e For IP phone dialing by gatekeeper only gatekeeper client side configuration is required so steps for calling router configuration can be omitted If the dialed number already registers to the gatekeeper it can automatically dial according to IP network or turn to PSTN network Without gatekeeper it is necessary to configure call route according to peer number and address information e For IP dialing by SIP it is required to configure SIP protocol interface and call router Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 23 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 WEB Configuration Guide Overview The chapter explains in details the configuration information about MP2000 104B Router functions including WAN configuration DDNS configuration running state monitoring LAN configuration Voice configuration VPN configuration route configuration system manage
172. g mode At the same time we can set different VLAN tag for voice and data sent from this port Some switches perform special operations according to different tag messages such as flow limit Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 25 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 WAN Configuration Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN Enter Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN via navigation menu and finish WAN accessing step by step according to wizard Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN This wizard will lead you to connect your device to Internet step by step Step 1 Choose the interface to be configured Step 2 Choose the type that you use to connect to the WAN Step 3 Configure other options basing on the type you have chosen in the Step 2 Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN Choosing Interface for WAN Connection This router can connect to Internet via multi interface Please choose the corresponding interface according to the cable or fibre that you used Choose the interface WAN gt Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN WAN Connection Type Choose the type for your Internet connection Fixed Address Line PPPoE Dial up Line O Ethernet Dynamic Address Line Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 26 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 WAN Accessing Line types there are 3 main ways to connect to Internet for MP2000 104A Router Fixed Address L
173. g the default IKE proposition the advanced user can choose existing IKE proposition or add new IKE proposition 1 4 IKE propositions are available for each tunnel and the user cannot edit or delete default IKE proposition For IKE proposition defined by user it cannot delete but edit if it has been applied to some tunnel Click New IKE Proposition hyperlink to add new IKE proposition Configure IKE Proposition Define the Name of IKE Proposition Configure the Encrypt Arithmetic used by IKE des Configure the hashing Arithmetic used by IKE Configure the Diffie Hellman of IKE groupl w 56400 Configure the Lifecycle of 5A which was created by IKE IKE proposition configuration is similar to New IKE Proposition Policy Configuration On this interface the user can inquire basic information of policy System will display Create a policy table if there is no policy All policies are displayed in one table Click to configure some policy and click to delete it a Policy settings Policy information J MS igen Use Tunnel Policy Local Destination Source Destination Forward Refuse Protocol IPsec to be j Edit Delete name address address port port policy proposal used policyO ip 1 0 0 0 24 1 0 0 0 24 any any Transmit x Set policy Click the Create a policy button to create a new policy Create a policy Click Eeste a police lto create a policy Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Informa
174. ghbor address The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group neighbor next hop self command The command is used to the next hop in the route notified to the BGP peer entity or peer entity group as the local IP address The no form of the command is used to cancel the existing configurations Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 191 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 neighbor neighbor address group name next hop self no neighbor neighbor address group name next hop self Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group Default status It is disabled by default neighbor password command The command is used to configure the MD5 password used on the TCP connections between BGP peer entity or peer entity groups The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address group name password Encryption type string no neighbor neighbor address group name password Encryption type string Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group encryption typ Encryption type string Password Default status By default it is disabled Note e If authentication function needs to be configured it should be used at the two ends of BGP neighbor at the same time e Here the encryption ty
175. group matches capability negotiation result strictly The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 202 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 neighbor neighbor address peer _group name strict capability match no neighbor neighbor address peer_group name strict capability match Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity peer_group name The name of the peer entity group neighbor unsuppress map command The command is used to configure BGP peer entity or peer entity group to be used for matching the route map of suppression route The suppression route matching with the route map is not suppressed again The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address peer_group name unsuppress map map name no neighbor neighbor address peer_group name unsuppress map map name Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity peer_group name The name of the peer entity group map name The name of the route map neighbor soo command The command is used to configure Site of Origin in extended community attributes of BGP peer entity The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address soo asn nn no neighbor neighbor address soo Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity asn nn Conf
176. hat if you enable the function of monitoring the CPU utilization status the monitor task will continously the default interval is 2 seconds collect CPU s data it will cost some cpu resource So don t enable the function unless you want to monitor the CPU utilization rate of each task to get some useful data Default s disable You will see the collected CPU data in 30 seconds if you enabled this function The 5 second utilization The 1 minute utilization The 5 minute utilization 1 2 2 Tick Enable CPU utilization monitor and you can check CPU utilizations in recent 5 seconds 1 minute and 5 minutes When CPU monitoring is running the task tCheckCPU continues with 2 second default interval to collect CPU data occupying certain CPU space Thus it is better to keep it off unless the user aims to check cpu utilization of each task This function is disabled by default Memory Running State Memory Monitor Utilization Used Memory Free Memory Total Memory 42 13 26 54MB 36 45MB 62 99MB You can check memory running state on this interface including current memory utilization current used memory current free memory and total memory NAT connection number The information of NAT Configurable NAT 23000 Used NAT 0 On this interface you can check current NAT application information including configurable NAT and used NAT For LAN with N equipments NAT connection number built in router should be less than 20N If it
177. he range of VLAN member is LANO LAN3 When adding the port members of a VLAN you can select whether the port is with tag The purpose of adding tag is to carry VLAN information in the packets transmitted on the port which indicates to which VLAN data frames belong to determine the attributes of the data frames Description The description information of the VLAN indicating the function or meaning of the VLAN After clicking Add you can create a VLAN You can click the gt icon after an existing VLAN to enter the VLAN configuration interface to edit the VLAN information Because of the system limitations the device can be configured with only 16 VLANs The VLAN ID conflict may appear when you configure the VLAN ID Here please select other VLAN ID Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 42 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Port Mirror The section explains the port mirror configuration in two aspects mirror port and mirrored port When you monitor input and output data of some ports by some monitoring equipment or software these ports monitored are called mirrored ports while the ports connect to monitoring equipment are called mirror ports Any port can be adopted as mirror port but only one mirror port is allowed On the other hand the user can set one mirrored port or several mirrored ports A port cannot be mirror port and mirrored port at the same time The input and output data of mirror
178. he route summarization of ospf is divided into the inter area route summarization and the external route summarization Configure the command area range on the area border router the area border router summarizes routes in the configured network segment and only generates one summary route summary Isa which is advertised by the area border router to other areas The Isa in the network segment will not be advertised outside The command area range This command realizes the inter area route summarization and the command can be used to perform the amalgamated calculation and route summarization in the area border The command no area range can make the command invalid area area id range prefix range advertise not advertise no area area id range prefix range advertise not advertise Syntax Description area id The area id prefix range The summarized address advertise To advertise outside not advertise To not advertise outside Default status do not summarize Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 162 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Note 1 The command area range only takes effect on the area border router Configure OSPF Redistributed External Route Summarization When redistributing routes from other protocols to ospf each route in the external link state advertisement is advertised respectively Via the command summary address all redistributed routes covered by the given network add
179. he stub area of ospf doesn t diffuse the type 5 LSA from the backbone to the nssa area however it can redistribute the external route of the autonomous system restrictedly NSSA can redistribute the type 7 autonomous system external route in the NSSA area via redistribution NSSA area border router translates the type 7 external LSA to the type 5 external LSA and floods the translated type 5 external LSA to the whole autonomous system area Summary and filtering are Supported during the process of translating The command area nssa This command configures an area as the nssa area Not so Stubby Area The command no area nssa can be used to cancel the NSSA feature of the area area area id nssa default information originate no redistribution no summary translate always translate candidate translate never translator role role no area area id nssa default information originate no redistribution no summary translate always translate candidate translate never translator role role Syntax Description area id OSPF area id default information originate NSSA area generates a default route no redistribution Not to redistribute the external route no summary Not to redistribute the summary LSA The area ARB of NSSA always translates the type 7 LSA to the type 5 LSA Whether to translate the type 7 LSA to the type 5 LSA depends on the election among NSSA ABR The area ARB of NSSA never translates the type 7 LSA to the type 5 L
180. his step cancels all H 323 protocol settings Then switch blank to SIP protocol In SIP protocol configuration page choose a binding interface or the configuration will not take effect After filling all the other blanks click Apply to switch to SIP protocol successfully The user can follow the similar steps to switch SIP protocol to H323 protocol Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 45 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The following figure takes H 323 protocol configuration as an example Protocol config Protocol H 323 protocol configuration Binding interface The interface on which the H323 protocol is running H323 ID Password It s used when the gatekeeper need to authenticate the gateway 60 The interval of sending keep alive packets from gateway to gatekeeper Unit s Range 30 3600 Default 60 Number transition When making a call via the gatekeeper the callee number will be translated rule following this rule Keep alive time Gatekeeper can route calls with called numbers that matched those prefixes to this gateway Two prefixes at most Composed of 0 9 and and separated by Ci PSTN prefix of gateway Local terminal type H 255 signal port 1720 Range lt 1 65535 gt Default 1720 G value 60 m The type of H323 terminal Default is GW value 60 Master gatekeeper 128 255 16 41 means multicast GK ID 3 Port 1718 x
181. hone Max length 30 digits or characters Physical location Max length 120 characters System uptime 2 hours 33 minutes 38 seconds System Name name of MP2000 104B Router Enable it immediately by modifying configuration without system restart System Time system clock time of MP2000 104B Router Username name of user Telephone phone number of user Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 110 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Physical Location address of user System Uptime regular running period from MP2000 104B Router start up to web page opening Administrator Settings MP2000 104B Router features in two users by default with one as admin and another as guest Administrator has maximal authority so the user can modify passwords of admin guest and customize user or enable passwords or enable or disable guest in admin page If the user logs in as guest this page will not display admin user but guest user The guest under only can modify password here rather than view relevant content of voice configuration After Applying password modification the user will required to input new password for opening other pages Administrator Settings Change the Login password Username New password Confirm the password ___ Set the enable password New password Enable or disable the i Enable Disable guest user The username and password of defaul
182. hone number Target PRI Encode Called Calling Fax Backup Config 2 912345 GW 128 255 17 222 10 g729 1 1 q x erreen Je Configure the dial plan The symbol of completing dialing Default it means none Timeout value of receiving phone number Unit second Range 1 10 Default 2 erir JL een Click VOIP Config or POTS Config to perform the switch between VoIP config and POTS config On this interface the user can check edit delete VOIP configuration and POTS configuration VOIP dial port configuration is in accordance with remote IP phone or gateway via IP network POST dial port is used to configure local communication Re registration is required provide the user adds or modifies phone number Re register gatekeeper for using H323 protocol or re register SIP server for using SIP protocol It is recommended to leave phone unused since communication should be interrupted during registration The symbol of completing dialing After the user inputs the phone number input the ending symbol to end the input At the same time the gateway uses the received number to discover call quickly You can configured or as the ending symbol and you can keep it null Timeout value of receiving phone number The timeout between two dials If the user does not dial within the timeout the gateway automatically ends the receiving number and uses the received number to initiate a call The default value is 2s Maipu Confidential amp
183. ial amp Proprietary Information Page 252 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 call route config POTS dial peer config Index eo Range 1 100 me Route phone number matching rule can configure completely phone Phone number number matching or prefix phone number matching Use x present for a digit use present for any digits of any length e g 028x present for any number that match prefix 028 Start voice port FXS O x End voice port FXS O v number increase Route priority Priority decreases as the digit increase ade The preferred voice codec when a call over IP calling a number of this dial peer default is g729 Called Apply index of transform rule to called number Calling Apply number transform to calling number Username ae Username for connecting to SIP server can not modify while protocol is running pa rd OoOo Password for connecting to SIP server can not modify while protocol is running register Click Apply to add the call route of the FXO port After the configuration succeeds the following interface is displayed iCall route config OIP Config POTS Config Index Phone number Encode Called Calling register Username password Batch Config gf29 g729 g7 29 g 29 gf29 Configure the dial plan The symbol of completing dialing Default it means none Timeout value of receiving phone number 2 Unit second Range 1 10 Default 2 In the a
184. ials document p aie Maa LJ Improve arrangement LJ Add more technical information LI Include images LJ Make it less technical L Add more detail LJ Improve index mame O eo S O Poses O s telephone S Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 3 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Contents About User Manual ccccccseccccccscncencsscceeceneneeecssecneenssecueecsecsneesseesneenenesnsens A PUDO asst idadiiidatadataninaiamaaieNa aaa ARONA AEEA 7 HOWTO Ger M TOUGH arrra AN 7 Customer SUPPO ansa a E E E E EEE 7 DOCU A GON o UDOT sorae p T euneuahnaanpsnapanbonn 7 MP2000 104B AC User Manual sccccscscseseceeeseeseeeeseeeeeeeasaneesessseeesseseseessarO MaMIW ANS a E E EEE E EEEE EE 8 MP2000 104B FO Deal aCe ersinnen anain TEE EAEE EEE rE 8 MP2000 104B Front Pane l acire aa i bane 9 MP OOO LO Back Panel ieren EEE A EEEE 10 Installation PCD al LIONS cocrerereceereter ncereneceresnehesiecperuci pumsurnensnructermbeuenanmbaren 10 BSC MEY PAE E PE T A E E A E O ted A A E E E E E 10 ENVIFONMIE ME osean E ESE O E E E EEE 11 Check Equipment amp Accessories s sssssssssnensnenrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnnnnnrnnnnnsnenenennnenennnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennne 12 Tools SEQUIM GNI scrise E T e a e e 12 Sy tem SCANLON reenen aaa 13 Eguipment Place Oln assanis e E a E A E nosaceabeanemter 13 Interlace COMMEC ION ainena a 13 Power CISCO rs cts epee a a E E E E 15 immediate CONNGUIATION scsssissins tesvesensrscidesssasiers
185. if you want to use to end the dialing you need to configure the ending symbol of receiving number on the Call route configuration interface as If you do not want to use the gateway waits for the timeout of receiving number The gateway performs the call pickup operation according to the received number By default the gateway enables the call pickup function that is not in the group but if you want to perform the call pickup in the group you need to do the corresponding configuration In a call pickup group you can only configure the FXS port The call pickup configuration interface is On the interface you can add edit and delete the call pickup group call Pickup Configuration Group List Group 3 Enable Shutdown Port Configuration 1 enable 1 0 1 1 edit delete enable 1 0 1 3 1 2 edit delete adi Group J Refzesh e One device allows to be configured with up to 10 call pickup groups e Only the FXS port of the device can be configured with the port of the call pickup group e The call pickup group does not allow the number of the ports as 0 When adding a call pickup group you need to add at least one port Otherwise adding a call pickup group fails Contrarily if you delete the last valid port in the call pickup group the call pickup group is deleted at the same time Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 72 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Click Add Group to e
186. igure the community number in the format of ASN NN Note There are two formats supporting the SOO value that is ASN NN and IP address nn bgp enforce first as command The command is used to configure the first AS number in AS PATH attributes of the BGP route information received from EBGP neighbor Should be the AS number of the neighbor The no form of the command is used to cancel the requirement Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 203 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 bgp enforce first as no bgp enforce first as Default status By default it is disabled bgp fast external failover command The command is used to configure the straight through EBGP neighbor to shut down the EBGP connection at once when the connected interface is down but does not wait until the BGP keepalive times out The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration bgp fast external failover no bgp fast external failover Default status By default it is enabled bgp bestpath command The command is used to configure the policy for selecting route of BGP The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration bgp bestpath as path ignore compare routerid compare confed aspath med confed missing as worst no bgp bestpath as path ignore compare routerid compare confed aspath med confed missing as worst Syntax Description as path ignore When selecting routes do not co
187. igured host name please confirm whether you configure the mapping of the host name and the confirmed IP address in the host name and IP address mapping table The mapping of the host name and the IP address needs to be configured via shell save Configuration The last item of the navigation is the Save Configuration function Click it and the current running configurations of the device are saved to the configuration file on the device When you modify the running configurations of the device and hope that the new configurations take effect when starting the device next time remember to save them Reset Button There is a reset button at the right of the back of MP2000 104B router It provides two functions for the user When the system is running SYS indicator flashes and INUSE indicator is off hold the reset button After more than 3 seconds the device deletes the configuration files of the system recovers the default configurations in Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 117 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 the factory and restarts After the device restarts successfully the default configurations are recovered When the system is powered on hold the reset button and the device downloads the application program from the FTP server After the downloading and the system is powered on normally the device deletes the configuration files and recovers the default configurations For the upgrade r
188. ill display configuration dialog of IP address and mask for user to fill in When the user choose host the user only needs to configure the specified IP address hen the user choose any system will not display configuration dialog of IP address and mask which indicates that the protection range is any Destination Subnet Host it similar to that of Local Subnet Host Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 89 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Apply to Tunnel choose not use or choose an existing tunnel Choose not use indicates that the policy should not be applied to tunnel System displays a checkbox of transmit or refuse policy for the user to choose In such case Advance is disabled When the user chooses a tunnel the check box of transmit or refuse policy is hidden Apply to pee tunner a V Select backup tunnel Select backup tunnel Select backup tunnel M tunnelS Tip you can choose three tunnels to be the backup tunnel at most tunnel Tip The master tunnel is tunneliBackup tunnels are tunnelS If the selected tunnel can be backup tunnel system displays Select backup tunnel checkbox for user to apply this function or not Tick Select backup tunnel checkbox and system will list all backup tunnels by default for user to select leaving aside the tunnels which have been selected The user can choose three tunnels to be the backup tunnel at most Certainly
189. ine It means that fixed IP address is provided by ISP such as China Telecom Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN Fixed Address Line Please enter the IP address got from the ISP Interface WAN ae IP address 128 265 16 91 The IP addrees it is usually apprized by the line provider g 202 10 68 69 Subnet 255 255 252 0 The subnet mask tt is usually apprized by the line provider e g 255 255 255 0 The default Gateway 128 255 19 254 Configure the IP address of the default gateway of the Static Address Line here This parameter is usually apprized by the line provider g 202 10 68 60 Preferred DNS server 10 0 0 10 The preferred DNS address Alternate DNS server 10 0 0 11 The backup DNS address Gateway checking S000 seconds Range is 0 32767 Default is interval 10s Line PRI High default Low Interface The MP2000 104B router provides WAN port that is fastethernetO and the fixed line access configuration of its 10 sub interfaces IP Address The WAN IP address of MP2000 104B Router is provided by ISP Subnet The WAN subnet mask of MP2000 104B Router is provided by ISP The user can get if from ISP Default Gateway It is provided by ISP The user can get if from ISP Preferred Alternate DNS server It is provided by ISP The user can get if from ISP Gateway checking interval After the function is enabled the device sends packets regularly to check normal stat
190. ing the network and the learned routes When routes from various sources exist in a same route they are elected via the administration distance of each kind of route 4 When the configuration of the route map is changed RIP protocol cannot apperceive automatically RIP cannot respond the change of the route map s configuration until the redistribution is re configured The command timers basic This command configures the time of RIP timer In a same RIP routing domain the configurations of timer basic on all routers should be consistent The no format of the command can be used to recover the time of RIP time to the default value timers basic update invalid holddown flush no timers basic Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 131 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Syntax Description update The sending interval second of the normal routing information s updating The value range Is 5 2147483647 invalid The valid time of a route second The value should be treble update If a route is not responded the packet refreshing in the valid time then the route is marked as the invalid route and is notified as unreachable However the route is still used for transmitting packets which means it will not be deleted immediately from the core routing table until the route is deleted from the routing database of RIP flush timer timeout The value range is 5 2147483647 holddown The time for restraini
191. ion Enter the Global Configuration Mode Enter interface s1 0 Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC Enter BGP Configuration Mode Specify AS number of BGP neighbor Configure the network to which the BGP is sent Description Enter the Global Configuration Mode Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC Enter RIP Configuration Mode Page 217 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 RouterB config rip exit RouterB config router bgp 200 Enter BGP Configuration Mode RouterB config bgp neighbor 192 1 1 1 remote as 100 Specify AS number of BGP neighbor RouterB config bgp neighbor 193 1 1 2 remote as 200 Specify AS number of BGP neighbor RouterB config bgp neighbor 193 1 1 2 next hop self Set its own address as the next hop RouterC configuration RouterC configure terminal Enter the Global Configuration Mode RouterC config interface loopback0 E RouterC config if loopback0 ip address Cie fo te 255 255 255 255 RouterC config if loopback0 interface s1 0 RouterC config if seriall 0 encapsulation hdlc Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC RouterC config if serial1 0 ip address 194 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterC config if seriall 0 interface s2 0 RouterC config if serial2 0 encapsulation hdlc a the link layer protocol HDLC RouterC config if serial2 0 ip address 255 255 255 0 RouterC config router rip Enter RIP Configuration Mode
192. ion of the dial peer If global fax protocol configuration comes into conflict with fax protocol of dial peer give priority to fax protocol configuration of dial peer When global fax capability is configured as T 38 When fax capability of dial peer is configured as T 38 current fax protocol is T 38 When fax capability of dial peer is configured disabled current fax capability is disabled When fax capability of dial peer is configured as transparent transmission current fax protocol is transparent transmission When there is no fax capability configured for dial peer current fax protocol is T 38 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 60 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 When global fax capability has not been configured When fax capability of dial peer is configured as T 38 current fax protocol is T 38 When fax capability of dial peer is configured disabled current fax capability is disabled When fax capability of dial peer is configured as transparent transmission current fax protocol is transparent transmission When there is no fax capability configured for dial peer current fax protocol has no fax capability Note When fax capability of dial peer is disabled and communication code type is G 711 fax data transmission can be performed via voice access Backup Switch configure IPSWICH switch function to realize switch of IP TO PSTN or IP TO IP and enable re routing from back
193. is 192 168 0 1 with 255 255 255 0 as subnet mask Admin is adopted both as log in username and password for administrator while guest is as log in username and password for guest All defaults can be modified in System Administration gt Administrator Settings Please connect directly the administrator computer to any internal interface LANO LAN3 of MP2000 104B Router via connecting line Enter Local Connection Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP and display properties page of Internet Protocol TCP IP Then set computer IP address as any one within range from 192 168 0 2 to 192 168 0 254 with Subnet mask as 255 255 255 0 and default Router as 192 168 0 1 Details are displayed as below Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties J ajx General You can get F settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Othenvise pou need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically f Use the following IP address IP address ee sists M o 2 Subnet mask aD a aa ear Ol Default gateway 197 168 0 J f Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DONS server Advanced lemnate DNS server Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 16 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Test whether it is connected to MP2000 10
194. k Enable DHCP service to allocate LAN address via DHCP service System shows you start address and end address input box which indicates address range of distribution by DHCP server System calculates the maximal address range automatically according to current internal network interface and the user can set address range by modifying relevant fields Generally speaking it is better to use address range generated by system automatically Advanced tick checkbox to pop up advanced configuration of DHCP service Default gateway default Router address that provides DHCP configuration to LAN Generally speaking it is IP address 192 168 0 1 of internal network interface DNS Server Address DNS server address that provides DHCP configuration to LAN WINS Server Address WINS server address that provides DHCP configuration to LAN Lease rent period of address distribution DHCP server reallocates address when it is beyond time limit After completing relevant parameter setting click Apply Then DHCP server allocates address for LAN which gets location automatically If LAN features in fixed IP address invert enable DHCP service and click Apply to disable DHCP service Click Refresh to refresh configuration of DHCP service Enter DHCP server status by clicking details button Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 103 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Q DHCP server settings gt DHCP server
195. k Exit to cancel all the configurations and return to the web homepage or click Next to enter the following configuration interface Use bridge between WAN and LAN Choose whether use bridge between WAN and LAN Use bridge between WAN and LAN Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 31 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Select the Use bridge between LAN and WAN check box to choose to use bridge technology between LAN port and WAN port Otherwise do not use the bridge technology If the sub interfaces are divided the LAN port is connected to the data sub interface Click Next to enter the Finished interface click Back to return to the previous interface or click Exit to drop all operations Configuration Wizard of Qos Finished The below is your configuration Please click the Done button to save them VOIP QoS Enable Max output band width 9600 Bursttransmission bytes 100000 Sub interface of VOIP data fastethernetd 1 VLAN ID of VOIP data sub interface 1 Sub interface of user data fastethernet0 2 VLAN ID of user data sub interface 2 Use bridge between WAN and LAN Previous Done Exit The above figure is Finished interface which displays the configuration data of the performed operations Confirm that the configurations comply with your requirements and then click Done to validate all the configurations If you want to make some changes click Previous to return to the previous interfa
196. k topology figure 4 6 configure default metric for Router A on the basis of 4 2 3 10 Command Description router A configure terminal To enter Global Configuration Mode router A config interface gigaethernetO To enter the g0 interface router A config if gigaethernetO ip address 20 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip address router A config if gigaethernetO interface gigaethernetl To enter the g1 interface router A config if gigaethernet1 ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip address router A config if gigaethernet1 exit To return to Global Configuration Mode router A config ip route 5 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 20 1 1 5 To configure the static routing router A config router rip To enter the RIP Configuration Mode router A config rip network 20 0 0 0 To specify the network number run by RIP router A config rip network 10 0 0 0 Same as above router A config rip version 2 To configure the RIP version router A config rip default metric 5 To configure the default cost of RIP redistribution as 5 router A config rip redistribute static To configure RIP to redistribute the Static routes The cost of 5 1 1 0 24 learned by Router B will be 6 Enabling VRF instance in RIP In the network topology figure 4 8 router A is a PE device the two LANs it connects with respectively locate in VRF a and VRF b RIP needs to be used in both VRF a and VRF b Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page
197. keeper in H323 SIP protocol configuration should be in accordance with interface configuration of 192 168 16 0 For example if LAN is in this segment configure the protocol to LAN interface See the figure below Qprotocel config Protocol H 323 protocol configuration Binding interface The interface on which the H323 protocol is running Since configured VPN policy is used to protect data in source address any data sent by H323 SIP from this interface source address IS encrypted in VPN tunnel In this example the user needs to configure VPN tunnel and policy in VPN Server so as to build VPN communication between MP2000 104B Routers Route Configuration Static Route Configuration Static route is defined by user which enables transmit packet from source to destination to use defined path In The section we introduce how to configure static route in MP2000 104B Router to perform network connection On this configuration interface view the information of configured static route Click to delete route information For creating a static route input accurate destination address subnet mask and Router address and then click Apply Q Static Route Settings Static route information Destination address Subnet mask Gateway Distance metric Config 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 128 255 19 254 x a Destination Address address of remote network For Class C address the first three fields form the network address le
198. lease reenter username and password This function should be in accordance with NetSmart accounting authentication server Note 1 When the called user hangs up or connection is failed the calling user can dial other extension numbers for 5 times at most 2 IVR authentication function should be in accordance with AAA authentication function The wrong username and password entering should be limited within 3 times or system will leave busy tone to the user directly after then Accounting Authentication Configuration The accounting authentication server matched with Maipu voice gateway is NetSmart accounting authentication server If you want to account or authenticate the calls of the gateway install NetSmart accounting authentication server on a PC in the network and Set IP address of the PC on the VoIP gateway as Radius server address The following is the configuration interface of enabling VoIP gateway NetSmart server program Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 77 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 NetSmart accounting authentication configuration Enable Netsmart client NetSmart accounting authentication need AAA to cooperate if you want to use the accounting authentication please Configure AAA Since accounting should be in accordance with AAA so configure AAA before starting accounting authentication See configuration details in the follow figure AAA configuration Address
199. letely phone Phone number number matching or prefix phone number matching Use x present for a digit use present for any digits of any length e g 028x present for any number that match prefix 028 Start voice port FXS 0 v End voice port number increase Route priority 10 Priority decreases as the digit increase gT29 x The preferred voice codec when a call over IP calling a number of this dial peer default is g729 Called 1 v Apply index of transform rule to called number Encode Calling v Apply number transform to calling number Doja Username for connecting to SIP server can not modify while protocol is running password Password for connecting to SIP server can not modify while protocol is running register In the above figure above we configure number of FXO 0 in POTS dial up port as 0286xxx and choose the rule with index as 1 in Apply index of transform rule to called number Thus when the user dials numbers beginning with 028 the device deletes 028s first and then seeks for call route according to number match rule For example when calling number 401 in MP2000 104B router dials 028604 the called number will be transformed into 604 according to number transform rule so as to accord with one number in PSTN Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 254 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Configure IP Fax Fax is a common telephone busine
200. ling Start Authentication the communication between source interface and destination interface should get authentication from Radius protocol accounting authentication server or other protocol authentication server Communication should be based on successful authentication For example the communications from VOIP to FXS from VOIP to FXO from FXS to FXS should get authentication in the figure above Not Configuration communication between source interface and destination interface is permitted without authentication from authentication accounting server In the figure above not configure is set for communications from VOIP to FXS from VOIP to FXO from FXS to FXS which means that no authentication is required for communication Forbid Calling forbid calling between source interface and destination interface In the figure above we set forbid calling for configuration of FXS to FXS Accounting function has two types Configure or Not Configuration Configuration perform accounting for communication between source interface and destination interface Not Configure not to perform accounting for communication between source interface and destination interface Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 79 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The user can configure authentication accounting option for ports according to specific requirements There is no configuration option for authentication
201. ll route configuration SO as to complete communication between local FXS and IP phones of other gateways in IP network Configure Call Route Click Voice Configuration gt Call Route Configuration in the navigation bar to display following interface Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 247 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 QCall route config OIP Config POTS Config Index Phone number Target PRI Encode Called Calling Fax Backup Config aaa Retresh J Back Configure the dial plan The symbol of completing dialing Default it means none Timeout value of receiving phone number 2 Unit second Range 1 10 Default 2 Click Add on the VOIP Config and POTS Config interfaces to configure all routes of MP2000 104B router VOIP dial up port corresponds to remote IP phone or gateway via IP network communication Configuration of POTS dial up port to local communication is in accordance with each port of this gateway Click the VOIP Config tab and then click Add to display following interface call route config POTS dial peer config Index l Range 1 100 401 Route phone number matching rule can configure completely phone Phone number number matching or prefix phone number matching Use x present for a digit use present for any digits of any length e g 028x present for any number that match prefix 028 Start voice port End voice port number increase R
202. low Current index Source index of Black white list index conversion Destination index Destination index of Black white list index conversion Current Index Source index of Black white list index conversion Destination Index Destination index of Black white list index conversion Click Clear to clear current black white list configuration For example Configuration information of black white list Configuration Information of Black white list Index Content of Black white list Configuration Calling number 001 Black list Calling number 002 White list Calling number 003 Black list Calling number 004 White list Calling number 112 Black list Calling number 113 Black list If calling number is 001 in calling black list it can be used to call called number 004 in called white list only if calling number is 002 in calling white list it can be used to call any number if calling number is OO5 undefined in black white list it is recognized as white list number that can call any called number For called number not to be restrained it is suggested that it should be added to called white list by default namely add called number xx to white list or number in calling black list cannot call undefined called number The rule validity sequence of the black white list is subjective to index so calling number is matched with small index rule by priority When the user matches one rule don t try to match other
203. ly to avoid serious damage downwards e Wiring should be performed properly Don t weigh on any weight on power line or tread on connecting line e Don t plug in or out cables when power is still on e Strongly recommend users to use UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply to avoid network system interruption resulting from electricity fault or to eliminate power interference e Strongly recommend users to ensure ground connection during operation N to G Voltage lt 5V so as to avoid equipment burning Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 10 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Environment Running Environment To ensure efficient operation and stable performance of MP2000 104B Router the equipment room should be kept at certain temperature and humidity It is good for circuit protection and MP2000 104B service life extension MP2000 104B Router should run indoors Recommended Temperature and Humidity Indoors Permanent Operating Short term Operating Permanent Operating Short term Operating Condition Condition Condition Condition 15 C 30 C 0 C 40 C 40 65 0 90 Note 1 For measuring points of MP2000 104B Router indoor operation temperature and humidity it refers to values retrieved from a point 1 5m from floor and 0 4m forehand from MP2000 104B Router 2 Short term operation condition refers to not exceeding 48h continuous operating time and annual 15 operating days Anti
204. main name analysis server Every time the user connects to the network the client program sends the dynamic IP address of the host to the server program on the service Supplier s host via information The server program is responsible for providing DNS service and realizing dynamic domain name analysis Click the DDNS Settings node on the navigation If DDNS modules are not uploaded to the device the system prompts whether to upload DDNS modules via a dialog box Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 33 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 DDNSEE DDNS AM 42 HAPS AHRS SRIPRSS LE EE BACH PAAR AcE RES Rill l EE Fi m si E Ta ETERS BIR ame Click OK to upload DDNS modules After uploading successfully the DDNS configurations can be used normally if you click Cancel the DDNS modules are not uploaded but every time you click the DDNS Settings node on the navigation the system prompts whether to upload DDNS modules via a dialog box until the DDNS modules are uploaded successfully After confirming that the DDNS modules are uploaded successfully click the DDNS Settings link on the navigation to enter the following configuration interface QDDNS Settings DDNS instance Instance Domain to Server to Server to Update Type Username Wildcard Configure name activate get IP update interval If you want to create a DDNS instance click Add to display following configuration
205. mation Page 86 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 When selecting the authentication mode as certificate the configuration interface is Tunnel Configuration Name of Tunnel Level of Security Authentication Mode Choose Certificate Destination Gateway Ip address or domain name Sign Local gateway Local out interface tunnell Low v Certificate v View the Information of Certificates Ip address or domain name of destination vpn device Must be unique in the whole network e g vpna or maipu com Click View the Information of Certificates to view the information of the selected certificates tis HEAR E LER PS iA E WEN eS EHA ARAF IA IEPA RASS oe CABAR Name of IKE Requesting lt 09 CH uUser Ch user 2003 07 29 00 00 00 2020 09 18 00 00 00 mapog Encrypt proposition Arithmetic gi des shal gi des md5 g2 3des shal g2 3des md5 g2 aes128 shal g2 aes128 md5 g5 3des sha256 g5 aes256 sha256 New IKE Proposition des des 3des 3des aes128 aes128 3des aes256 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Hashing Diffie_Hellman Lifecycle Edit Delete Choose Arithmetic group s shal group1 86400 md5 group1 86400 shal group2 86400 md5 group2 86400 shal group2 86400 md5 group2 86400 sha2 256 group5 86400 sha2 256 group5 86400 OOOOOO00 Apply to Tunnel Page 87 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 When usin
206. mber of the next hop s paths to the default value maximum paths max number no maximum paths max number Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 126 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Syntax Description max number To configure the maximum number of the next hop s paths of RIP load balance The value range is 1 6 Default status number paths 4 Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode Note When the number of the learned route s next hops exceeds the maximum number of the route s next hops then to replace the next hop which has already consumed half or over half of the valid time with the learned new next hop The command maximum prefix This command is to configure the upper limit number and the warning number of the routing items in RIP routing database The configuration of this command doesn t affect the learned routes The no format of the command can be used to cancel the restriction of the upper limit number and the warning number maximum prefix max number warning number no maximum prefix Syntax Description max number To configure the value of the upper limit number of the routing items in RIP routing database to not learn new route any more if the value is exceeded The value range is 1 65535 warning number To configure the proportion of the warning number of the routing items to the upper limit number of the routing items in RIP routing database The system alarms
207. me The name of the peer entity group map name The name of the route mapping in Input notification out Output notification Default status None neighbor route reflector client command The command is used to configure the BGP peer entity or peer entity group as the client of the route reflector The no form of the command is used to cancel the existing configuration neighbor neighbor address group name route reflector client no neighbor neighbor address group name route reflector client Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of BGP neighbor group name The name of the peer entity group Default status By default it is disabled neighbor send community command The command is used to configure the community attributes to be sent to the BGP peer entity or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to cancel the existing configuration neighbor neighbor address group name send community both extended standard no neighbor neighbor address group name send community both extended standard Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 193 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group both The sending standard and extended community attributes extended Send the extended community attributes standard Send the standard community attributes
208. ment and save configuration The user interface of WEB system is divided into two parts navigation bar and configuration interface The navigation menu model is based on log in user s authority and current running state of the device The following interface shows an example when the user logs in MP2000 104B Router as the administrator in route mode The left part of the interface is the navigation bar of the web management system Click the configuration module in the navigation bar the corresponding configuration interface is displayed at the right part of the interface pw English Web http www maipu com E mail overseas mail maipu com Tel 66 28 85148850 Product Information Product Information WAN Config Welcome to Maipu Web Management System DDNS MP2000 104B AC Version Information Status Monitor System ID 000174000000 LAN Config Monitor Version tizs5 VoIP Config IOS Version 9 2 2 VPN Config IOS Image File rp10 iv 8 2 2 bin Route Config Compiled Time of IOS 2008 4 10 09 05 27 WEB System Version 1 1 build 48 System Management y x Compiled Time of WEB System 2008 4 8 17 29 08 Save Configuration Running Mode Router i Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 24 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 system Information View current system information via Navigation gt Product Information The system information includes system
209. mode Application Example Step 1 Run and set TFTP FTP server Use Maipu TFTP server CISCO TFIP or other TFIP FIP server The following takes Maipu TFTP as an example to describe Open Maipu TFTP server and click Option on the tools bar to display following interface Set Public Path as the directory where the program to be upgraded is located set server IP address as the PC address set server port as TFTP service port 69 the other parameters adopt the default values Click OK to close the Option interface and return to the main interface Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 229 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 lo x EHE WM Eco By l a ai gi z4 EA Bo amu r Tw Few BEO Fw M mA Se eet Iz mprouter_mp2600_edition _ diese yit O Pim ANRE ARS SSIPHALE 128 255 32 10 Ikean fs TA 0 HOH C Listening Set Maipu TFTP server Step 2 Make TFTP server in the listening state Click Listen on the tools bar to display following interface l MaiPu TFTP Server Client 128 255 32 10 J mprouteri _mp2600_editioni _ EA YJ ioj x EDE 0 Eko AP EHI fo afo o To miv peo ah EHG MEMO wata Pee eR HEE AFA Pi Listening Maipu TFTP server is in listening state Step 3 Connect the network Connect the PC as TFTP server and router via Ethernet or via other modes to ensure that they can ping each other Step 4
210. mote gateway or soft terminal plays the music System prompt language type Currently English and Chinese voice prompts are provided By default it is Chinese Before selecting the language type please confirm whether the corresponding voice file is downloaded to the gateway FLASH If not please download it Otherwise it cannot be played after configuration FXS global configuration Configure the global attributes of call FXS cards on the gatway There are three itmes Dial Space range 10 100 unite 10ms default 30ms Flash hook Length Lower Limit range 4 100 unite 10ms default 13ms Flash hook Length Upper Limit range 4 100 unite 10ms default 60ms Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 84 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 VPN Configuration VPN Initial Configuration The user can perform VPN initial configuration in central server on this interface QPN initial configuration VPN initial configuration Central gateway IP address or domain name Local IP or Interface user password C Get the initialization configuration automatically when the device started Get configuration Cancel a Central gateway address of VPN initial parameter Local IP Interface choose IP or interface for device to connect to external network To choose an interface is recommended User username assigned to device Password password assigned to device Get the initiation
211. mpare as path compare routerid When selecting routes compare routerid compare confed aspath When selecting routes compare the confederation as path med confed When selecting routes compare the med between the confederation routes med missing as worst When selecting route the route without med has the highest priority bgp always compare med command The command is used to configure allowing comparing the MED attributes of BGP route from different AS neighbors The no form of the command is used to prohibit the comparison bgp always compare med no bgp always compare med Default status By default do not compare the MED attributes of BGP route from different AS neighbors Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 204 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 bgp cluster id command The command is used to configure the cluster ID of the route reflector The no form of the command is used to delete the configured cluster ID of the route reflector bgp cluster id cluster id in ip cluster id in num no bgp cluster id Syntax Description cluster id in ip The cluster ID of the route reflector in the form of IP address cluster id in num The cluster ID of the route reflector in the form of numbers bgp router id command The command is used to configure the router ID used by the local BGP The no form of the command is used to delete the configured route ID bgp router id router id no bgp router id
212. n r this dial neer ande Imni The preferred voice codec when making a IP call over this dial peer efault g7 2 Called Apply index of transform rule to called number Calling Apply number transform to calling number Fax Configure the fax capability of the dial peer Backup Apply Cancel On this interface the system provides the user with four options to choose in the Fax drop down box The first one indicates that it inherits the configuration of Enable global T 38 capability of this Router and VOIP dial peer is by default Disable indicates that the fax capability of this dial peer is disabled T 38 stands for fax via T38 protocol Pass through indicates transparent transmission mode for fax so the code type of gateways of two side Should be the same Fox example we set it as g 711A code here so that of peer gateway should be g 711A code too If the user doesn t configure Enable global T 38 capability of this gateway the calling gateway has T38 capability by default When the gateway is used as called gaetway it will confirm whether to support T38 fax capability by checking call route list according to calling number Now we configure index 3 5 9 10 as these four fax capabilities Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 256 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 QCall route config VOIP Config POTS Config Index Phone number Target PRI Encode Called
213. n fact the local domain refers to the local segment number such as 128 255 16 0 The remote IP address such as 128 255 16 90 multiplies the subnet mask such as 255 255 252 0 by bit If the result is equal to the local domain 128 255 16 0 regard that the remote IP address belongs to the local domain When dialing the phone of the gateway where the IP is located via SIP do not use STUN Click Advanced configuration to enter the configuration interface of SIP advanced options Advanced configuration DTMF sending mode STUN Configuration M Enable STUN client Current binding interface Primary STUN server status Primary STUN server domain name Primary STUN server IP address Primary STUN server port Backup STUN server status Backup STUN server domain name Backup STUN server IP Backup STUN server port NAT type auto detect period NAT keep alive time Current type of NAT Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information RIP NTE Dynamic Payload type jor Range 97 127 Default 101 Aoply Jf Back fastethernetO v fre maipu com fizs 255 16 97 478 Range 1024 10000 default 3478 fre maipu com cn fizs 255 16 96 P478 Range 1024 10000 default 3478 fisoo Range 300 3600 second default 1800 s0 Range 30 600 second default 180 Detect NAT type Page 51 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Advanced Configuration DTMF sending mode Use the INFO mode of SI
214. n ftp data Cc 5 3 T O 4 time Time synchronization time Simple network snmp management protocol UDP snmp 4 O m chargen CharSYSer generator chargen O daytime Daytime daytime O 5 Discard discard Echo discard echo 4 O lt echo O lt exec Exec exec sail O 9 finger Finger finger gopher Gopher gopher T hostname ident hostname NIC hostname server ident O Ident Protocol ao 4 O D W uo Internet Relay Chat 4 O e klogin kshell Kerberos login klogin kshell a O Kerberos shell 4 O 9 Login OJO 7 U Printer service Network News Transport Protocol PIM Auto RP nntp TCP nntp 4 O ae pim auto rp pim auto rp sunrpc Sun Remote Procedure Call TCP sunrpc mail O lt syslog Syslog syslog TCP tacacs talk tacacs talk TAC Access Control System Talk uucp Unix to Unix Copy Program TCP uucp O 5 whois Nickname whois Cc UO 5 O U JI N SIP signal protocol H323 A TC Oo H323 A H 323 signal protocol A JI WN JI N 4 O U UO 6 JIJ g go JIJ g go Real time Transfer Protocol UDP Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 106 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Dynamic Address Translation Configuration On this interface the user can view and configure dynamic address transla
215. n not modify while protocol is running password Password for connecting to SIP server can not modify while protocol is running register aapi JA cancet Index digit of this dial rule Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 61 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Phone Number FXS interface oriented refers to configuration of phone number connected to FXS FXO interface oriented refers to configuration of dial prefix from FXO to PSTN Start voice port configure corresponding start voice port of POST port End voice port configure corresponding end voice port of POST port Number increase If the item is ticked the phone numbers from the start voice port to the end voice port increase by 1 with the above phone number as the start phone number Route priority configure priority 1 20 Priority decreases as the digit increase Default 10 Router is disabled when digit is 20 Encode configure voice encode type Called Apply index of transform rule to called number Calling Apply number transform to calling number Username username for connecting to SIP server when use SIP protocol Password password for connecting to SIP server when use SIP protocol Register register to gatekeeper or not when use H323 protocol Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 62 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Black white List Configuration First see the model of black
216. n on the basis of this configuration even if terminal capability set of opposite terminal excludes H245 string capability H245 string judge capability set of opposite terminal allows DTMF signal sending in H245 connection on the basis of this configuration unless terminal capability set of opposite terminal excludes H245 string capability Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 48 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 GRQ Interval It refers to GRQ sending interval when Router registers to gatekeeper Start H245 Tunnel Mode Choose to build calling via tunnel mode or not It refers to envelop H245 message in H225 message and then send it It is always applied in fast connection or faxing Send ARQ to Gatekeeper When Receive IP Call Send ARQ message to gatekeeper or not when Router is called Send BRQ to Gatekeeper send BRQ to gatekeeper or not provided encoding mode has changed Start it when use it with gatekeeper bandwidth management SIP Protocol Configuration To switch to SIP protocol click Back to enter the Protocol Config interface and choose Protocol as null Click OK to stop the current H323 protocol and then select SIP to display SIP protocol configuration interface Protocol config a Protocol Configuration of SIP Binding interface WAN The interface on which the SIP is running Registrar ip 192 168 0 99 IP Address of SIP server address Registrar domain l ha
217. n receive IP call CI Send BRQ to gatekeeper Apply Back Call mode select H323 call mode fast or slow Authentication Type of H323 the authentication type of H323 includes h235CAT h235AuthProcedurel h235AuthSimpleMD5 and Maipu private authentication It is disabled by default Combine equipment authentication setting with gatekeeper authentication function to improve safety of H323 network so as to realize gatekeeper s authorization and limit on Router equipment It can enhance gatekeeper s management of each H323 terminal across H323 network Moreover the user can configure SNTP server to endow all equipment involved in authorization and authentication with unified network time Time stamp authentication is an essential link in authentication Bear capability select one value for bear capability It is used to enhance compatibility with equipments provided by other manufacturers Call Divert Mode there are two divert mode one is to mix call divert mode in 450 messages and the other is to take call divert mode in facility messages The latter is defined by default DTMF Mode there are two signal sending modes H 245 string DTMF Signals are transmitted via H245 connection Q931 keypad DTMF signals are transmitted via H225 connection Adopt H245 string indicates DTMF signal sent by H245 connection H245 string don t judge capability set of opposite terminal allows DTMF signal sending in H245 connectio
218. n web default login 12825516103 admin P M0 Click Add to display following interface Input the device IP address user name password and description and click OK to create a piece of login information C x HE 128 2551610 O HPS admin om fer it HOB ae e Edit a piece of login information Select a desired line of login information on the User name and password management of WEB NMS interface and click Edit to display following interface Input the new login information and click OK Delete a piece of login information Select a desired line of login information on the User name and password management of WEB NMS interface and click Delete If the device name is configured as Default the configuration is the default user name password used by the user for logging in to the web Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 114 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Configuration File Management On the interface you can back up or recover the configuration files of the device Click Backup select the directory for saving the backup file and click OK to download the configuration file of the current gateway to the PC hard disk of the administrator If you want to use the existing configuration file to cover the configurations in the current gateway click Browse select the desired configuration file and click Recover Then the system displays the prompt for restarting the device The new co
219. nd network all the interfaces that can match with the address and the wildcard mask pair are set into the specified area The O in the wildcard mask means the placeholder 1 means can be matched randomly Configure Basic Parameters of OSPF Interface OSPF permits to modify the OSPF parameters of a given interface The modification for the interface s parameters is not necessary However the parameters of some interfaces should be consistent in the whole OSPF area These parameters can be modified via the command ip ospf hello interval ip ospf dead interval and ip ospf authentication in the interface mode Therefore if users need to configure these parameters they should ensure that the configurations of all OSPF routers in a same OSPF area are consistent and compatible The command tp ospf authentication This command specifies the authentication mode and the authentication password of the OSPF interface The no format of the command can be used to clear the specified authentication mode and authentication password ip ospf ip address authentication message digest null no ip ospf ip address authentication message digest null Syntax Description ip address Can individually specify the authentication mode of the specified interface s address on OSPF interface authentication To configure the plain text authentication authentication message digest To configure the MD5 authentication authentication null Null authentication
220. nd packets with which version and which form on the interface ip rip send packet to configure RIP to enable sending packets on the config if xxx interface ip split horizon poisoned to configure RIP to enable split horizon or config if xxx poisoned reverse on an interface ip Summary address rip To configure the summary address of RIP version 2 config if xxx A B C D n on the interface show ip rip vrf vrf name To configure overall information of RIP enable show ip rip database detail To display information about RIP routing database enable vrf vrf name detail show ip rip interface To display information about RIP interface enable interface show ip protocols rip To display related information about RIP protocol enable show running config router To display information about RIP configuration enable rip show ip route rip To display RIP routing information in the routing enable table Note 1 The symbol before Commands means that there is the configuration example to explain the command in details later 2 Configuration mode means the mode for executing the configuration command such as config config if xx interface name and config xx protocol name Description of Related Commands for Configuring RIP The command router rip This command enables the RIP protocol and enters the RIP routing configuration mode the no format of the command can be used to disable the RIP protocol
221. nding mode and normal sending mode To improve sending performance of IP voice packet in IP network set TOS field of IP head in a higher priority level in IP package via preference sending mode Thus system will give priority to IP data processing in network sending as long as IP transfer points in IP voice packet access support IP TOS prosperity Area Code If the calling number starts with a header as the same as this code the header is discarded before displaying onto the FXS FXO Line Detect Interval configure interval of FXO line detection Default 10 minutes FXO line diction is enabled by default The detection will be performed regularly to check whether FXO port has been connected to Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 82 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 phone line The call router can transfer to the FXO port by calling only if there is line connection FXO Dial out Flash hook Time configure FXO dial out flash hook time Set a larger value for bad connection in FXO dial out Echo Cancellation Length 32ms 64ms or 128ms Check UDP Checksum whether perform UDP check on voice packet and fax packet in IP calling Play Ring back to Caller enable or disable ring back function of gateway in IP calling A B Assume that A is calling user and B is called user GW1 of user A A can be other terminals such as IAD which is connected via soft switch plate cannot play ring back
222. nel _ to create a tunnel Tunnel Configuration Name of Tunnel Level of Security Low v Authentication Mode Secret Key eeeee Destination Gateway Ip address or domain name Share Previously Ip address or domain name of destination vpn device Sign Must be unique in the whole network e g vpna or maipu com Local gateway Local out interface WAN v Must be unique in the whole network Loca sign is constrained if the Sign local ip address generated dynamic Name of Tunnel it is given by system automatically by default The user can modify it according to requirement Level of Security default security levels high normal and low Authentication Mode choose share previously or certificate to enter configuration interfaces It is share previously by default Secret Key configure public key previously It will be displayed in share previously mode IP address or Domain Name configure IP address or domain of Router peer It is any by default Sign it refers to identity sign of peer gateway in peer gateway configuration or it refers to identity sign of local gateway in local gateway configuration Fill it according to requirement or leave it as default Attention local gateway signal should be filled in when local IP is dynamic Local Out Interface it refers to out interface of local data The user should choose one interface for configuration Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Infor
223. network 20 0 0 0 router C config rip version 1 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Description To enter Global Configuration Mode To enter the e0 interface To configure the ip address To enter the RIP Configuration Mode To specify the network number run by RIP To configure RIP version Page 149 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Monitoring and Debugging of RIP Display information of RIP protocol RIP Command Description show ip rip vrf vrf name To display overall information of RIP show ip rip database detail vrf vrf name To display information about RIP routing database detail show ip rip interface interface To display information about RIP interface show running config router rip To display information about RIP configuration show ip route rip To display RIP routing information in the routing table show ip protocol rip To display related information about RIP protocol Display debugging information of RIP protocol Command Description debug ip rip all To display all debug information about RIP debug ip rip events To display debug information about RIP events debug ip rip packet To display debug information about receiving sending and processing RIP packets debug ip rip trigger To display debug information about RIP timer OSPF Dynamic Routing Configuration The main contents of the section are Brief Introduction of OSPF protocol Description of OSPF basic commands D
224. nfiguration Examples Example 1 Basic configuration of BGP i rs LO 2 2 2 2 32 je i E PEN i i a Y P aia S gt gt Fj S gt 192 1 1 1 24 ROUTER A 192 1 1 2 24 193 1 1 1 24 193 1 1 2 24 ROUTER B ROUTER C ASLO AS200 Illustration The port S 1 0 192 1 1 1 of Router A connects to the port S1 0 192 1 1 2 of Router B the port S2 0 193 1 1 1 of Router B connects to the port S2 0 193 1 1 2 of Router C The loopback addresses of three routers are 1 1 1 1 Router A 2 2 2 2 Router B and 3 3 3 3 Router C RouterA is located in AS 100 while RouterB and RouterC are located in AS 200 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 214 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 RouterA configuration Command RouterA configure terminal RouterA config interface loopback0O RouterA config if loopback0 ip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterA config if loopback0 interface s1 0 RouterA config if seriall 0 encapsulation hdlc RouterA config if seriall 0 ip address 192 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterA config if seriall 0 exit RouterA config router bgp 100 RouterA config bgp neighbor 192 1 1 2 remote as 200 RouterA config bgp network 1 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 RouterA config bgp exit RouterB configuration Command RouterB configure terminal RouterB config interface loopbackO RouterB config if loopback0 ip address 2 2 2 2 255 255 255 255 RouterB
225. nfiguration can take effect only after restarting the device so it is recommended to restart the device Configuration File Management Backup the configuration file of system Click the Backup button to download system configuration file Backup System configuration file recovering Click the Recover button to recover the system configuration file After recovered you must restart the device to take effect Filename m OTE Log Management Display log information saved in the flash file QLog management Content of Logs SysLog function enabled Console logging level debugging Monitor logging level debugging Trap logging enable Flash logging level warnings max size 51200 Buffer logging level notifications max size 53248 The Context of logging file Clear Log information level definition The system is unavailable Actions need to be taken at once Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 115 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 3 Error status 5 Normal but noticeable status 6 Report information Debug information In the logs there is the following content SYS 5 LOGIN Here 5 in SYS 5 LOGIN means the level You can find its description from the above table Note Click Clear and the system displays the prompt for clearing all logs If clicking OK all the logs are cleared so please be careful ONMP Parameter Configuration Simple Ne
226. nfigure the password chain of the packet authentication on the interface of RIP version 2 When the password and password chain are both configured use the configured password key chain name To configure the name of the packet authentication s password chain on the interface of RIP version 2 Default status no authentication for protocol packets Command mode Interface Configuration Mode Note When processing MD5 authentication the following points need to be noticed 1 In the MD5 authentication information the key ID needs to be carried When configure the password via key the key ID is 1 When configure the password via key chain key ID is the key ID of the password on key chain 2 If the key IDs of the two ends in the authentication are not the same the key ID which is bigger can pass the authentication while the smaller one cannot Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 133 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 3 The serial number information is carried in MD5 authentication information which can prevent from re play attacks The command ip rip receive version This command configures the version of the packets received by RIP on the interface The no format of the command can be used to recover the version to the default value ip rip receive version 1 2 12 no ip rip receive version Syntax Description 1 To configure RIP only to receive RIP version 1 packets on the interface
227. ng the called number is Switched according to selected number transition rule Please refer to Voice Configuration Number Transition Configuration Optional configuration is used for irregular voice number design Leave it unused or result in failed calling For application please make confirmation about it with Tech Service Department of Maipu Communication Co Ltd PSTN Prefix of gateway Register this prefix to gatekeeper and then gatekeeper can route matched call to this gateway You can configure two prefixes They comprise numbers and and are separated by Optional configuration If the gateway doesn t provide other gateways with PSTN this option should not be configured Local terminal type The type of H 323 terminal It reflects the terminal performance Priority definitions of H 323 terminal type from highest level to grass root are MCU gatekeeper Router terminal MC MP MC unit and Non MC amp Non MP unit optional configuration H 225 signal port The signal address port number of local H 225 call The default value is 1720 Master Backup Keeper fill in blanks with master gatekeeper IP domain name or indicates multicast applied in gatekeeper seeking Optional configuration Leave it unused if the user doesn t adopt gatekeeper network composite Initiate IP call via VOIP call port of router GK ID It refers to the domain where the gatekeeper is located necessary information for gatekee
228. ng an invalid route from updating When a route is marked as invalid it enters the update restraining status In the update restraining status the valid route is not permitted to be respond the packets updating until the holddown time is exhausted The value range is 0 2147483647 flush The time for holding an invalid route before it is cleared second The value should be bigger than the value of holddown Otherwise the invalid route will be updated by the new route before the period of restraining update is out The value range is 5 2147483647 Default status update 30 seconds invalid 180 seconds holddown 180 seconds flush 240 seconds Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode Note If holddown is set as O routes don t have the period of restraining update The command version This command configures the RIP global version The configurations of the command on all routers in a same RIP routing domain should be consistent We suggest users use the RIP version 2 and no auto summary The no format of the command can be used to recover the RIP global version to the default value version 1 2 no version 1 2 Syntax Description 1 To configure the RIP global version as version 1 2 To configure the RIP global version as version 2 Default status RIP version 1 Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 132 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Ver
229. nitor task will continously the default interval is 2 seconds collect CPU s data it will cost some cpu resource So don t enable the function unless you want to monitor the CPU utilization rate of each task to get some useful data Default s disable You will see the collected CPU data in 30 seconds if you enabled this function The 5 second utilization The 1 minute utilization The 5 minute utilization 2 2 o Memory Monitor Utilization Used Memory Free Memory Total Memory 42 13 26 54MB 36 45MB 62 99MB The information of NAT Configurable NAT Used NAT The information of WAN The name Rate of receive packet pps Rate of receive byte Kbps Rate of send packet pps Rate of send byte Kbps Total rate Kbps WAN 3 1 9 1 3 9 3 8 The current network state there are only the first 50 entries if you want to see more record and the restrict of PC connection please click the More gt gt Sort by total connections Sort by total rate Rate of send Rate of send Rate of receive Rate of receive Total TCP UDP other sessions PC IP packet byte packet byte rate connections name address i pps KBps pps KBps KBps The number of connected sessions The configuration of alarm threshold The detailed information about each monitoring option is shown as below CPU Utilization Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 35 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 M Enable the CPU utilization monitor Notice t
230. nnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnernernnnnne 234 Update Troubleshooting Methods for Irregular System sssssssssrnsrnnsrnnsrnnsrrnrnnne 240 Typical Applications ssiiissssisrsaiannna aa A aici ee ee E 242 Oo ile Ulla seoit enn nn rr re ee er er er er 243 Configure Communication between Local ANd H323 cccccsecesseseeseceeeeteeceteneeeseeseeneseseeaeeatees 244 CS OPM V0 FN ie scones osteitis E EE N OE dea oc scenieyesetedoeursecegesseenodeeu ects 244 Configure Communication between FXS and PSTN ccccsccsesecseceeseceeeetoeesteneceeseeseeneatsetansanees 250 Bo pet kai aE e sarc tenes cc E E A T A E O N E T 255 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 6 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 About User Manual Purpose The MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 provides basic information you need to get going with the router designed and developed by Maipu The document provides right answers to your technical queries about the routers How to Get in Touch The following sections provide information on how to obtain support for the Maipu English documentation and Maipu products Customer Support If you have problems or questions regarding your product please contact us by e mail at overseas maipu com You can call our Overseas Business Division over 86 28 85148850 85148041 85148050 85148750 and 85148997 Documentation Support Maipu Communication Technology Co Ltd welcomes comments and Suggesti
231. not applied to some dial port Namely it takes effect only when number transform rule is bounded with dial port Number transform configuration interface contains two parts number transform list and number transform configuration ES Number transform config Te Number transform list index Content of transform rule Configure Change the numbers begining with to numbers me z Delete TOX benginning with 025 i 1 9 028 Click Add to display interface of number transform configuration Transform rule index Number before transform Range 1 100 Composed of 0 9 x and Number after Composed of 0 9 and transform i configure rule in batch r Jl cance There are two ways for number transform configuration 1 single number configuration by clicking Add 2 configuration in batch As the figure illustrates above there are three options for single number configuration transform rule index number before transform and number after transform Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 57 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Fill the blanks according to range implied in bracket and then click Apply to add new number transform rule in Number Transform List The user can cancel the new transform rule by clicking Cancel or delete the wrong configuration rule directly by clicking Delete on the right of list To configure rules in batch tick Configure rule
232. nter the following configuration interface Input the information of the new call pickup group on the interface and click Set Click Back to return to the interface of displaying call pickup groups call Pickup Configuration Enable Group Group i 4 t me a il Ports List Port Configuration Attention You need to add one port at least Add DPE Enable Group Enable disable call pickup group Tick Enable Group check box to Enable call pickup group Group ID The serial number of the call pickup group The value range is 1 10 Port The port of the call pickup group Group Ring Configuration Group ring is one service of local gateway FXS FXO card When there is incoming call and if the called number matches the number of the group ring the phones of all FXS ports in the group ring at the same time The FXO in the group initiates the call to the corresponding configured number via the port But as long as one port is connected the other ports stop ringing and recover the original status The group ring configuration interface is On the interface you can add edit and delete the ring group amp Callee Group Configuration Group List ID Group Phone Number Enable Shutdown Register Ports configuration i 0286000 enable 3 1 0 1 1 edit delete 2 0106000 enable 1 3 edit delete Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 73 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Note One device can be config
233. o display detailed information area opaque as self Originate adv router ip addr link state id show ip ospf interface interface To display interface information of OSPF users can see which interface name detail run OSPF show ip ospf process id neighbor all detail neighbor To display information about OSPF neighbor id interface interface addr Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 181 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 To display process parameters and the statistic information of OSPF show ip ospf protocols protocol show ip ospf process id route To display routing information of OSPF show ip ospf process id virtual gt display information about OSPF virtual link link show ip route ospf To display OSPF routing information in the core routing table show run router ospf To display OSPF process running presently For example Command Description of displayed results show ip ospf interface name gigaethernet0 is up line protocol is up monitor the information about Internet Address 129 255 19 90 an interface of ospf 129 255 255 255 a 129 255 19 90 d 129 255 255 255 Area 0 0 0 0 area 0 MTU 1500 Process ID 64 ospf process number 64 Router ID 222 222 222 222 router 1D 222 222 222 222 Network Type BROADCAST type broadcast Cost 1 cost value 1 Transmit Delay is 1 sec State Backup Status BDR Priority 1 Priority 1 TE Metric 0 Designated Router
234. o modify the measurement of the specified route To configure the minimum sending interval among each packet in a RIP update To configure a interface as the passive interface of RIP To configure the buffer size for RIP receiving packets To configure RIP to redistribute routes of other protocols To configure the time of RIP timer To configure the RIP global version To configure the protocol packet authentication on the interface of RIP version 2 To configure the version of the packets received by RIP on the interface Page 122 of 257 Config mode config config rip config rip rip af config rip rip af config rip rip af config rip rip af config rip rip af config rip config rip rip af config rip rip af config rip config rip config rip rip af config rip rip af config rip rip af config rip rip af config rip rip af config rip rip af config rip rip af config rip rip af config config config config config config config af config config config config config config config config config if xxx config if xxx MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 ip rip receive packet To configure RIP to enable receiving packets on the config if xxx interface ip rip send version 1 2 1 To configure the version of the packets sent by RIP config if xxx 2 21 12 1 compatible on the interface and specify to se
235. of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 NetSmart accounting authentication configuration Enable Netsmart client NetSmart accounting authentication need AAA to cooperate if you want to use the accounting authentication please Configure AAA PSTN call accounting area Composed of at most six digit Accounting and Authentication configuration Source interface Destination interface Authentication function Accounting function VOIP FXS Start authentication Configuration VOIP FXO Start authentication Configuration ml FXS Hot configure FXS FXS Forbid calling FXS FXO Start authentication Confi guration y Hot configure Configuration Hot configure Hot configure FXO Hot configure FXO FXS Hot configure RJIRIEIEJE clear all authentication configuration clear all accounting configuration PSTN Call Accounting Prefix configure accounting prefix of device For communication from FXO port the device adds accounting prefix to the called number in accounting message and then send the called number with accounting prefix to accounting server The type of communication source port and that of destination port are fixed so the user only needs to configure authentication function and accounting direction for each type There are three authentication functions start authentication not configure and forbid cal
236. of external routing The section explains how to configure BGP dynamic routing protocol of Maipu routers for network interconnection BGP Configuration Commands Command router bgp autonomous system neighbor neighbor address group name remote as_ as number neighbor group name peer group neighbor neighbor address peer group group name neighbor neighbor address group name next hop self neighbor neighbor address group name password Encryption type string neighbor neighbor address group name advertisement interval asorig seconds neighbor neighbor address group name route map map name in out neighbor neighbor address group name route reflector Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Description Enable BGP process specify the local autonomous system number and enter the BGP protocol configuration mode Specify BGP peer entity or the autonomous system number of the peer entity group Create a peer entity group Add the peer entity to a peer entity group Configure the next hop in the route notified to the BGP peer entity or peer entity group as itself Configure the MD5 password of BGP peer entity or peer entity group Configure the interval of sending route to BGP peer entity or peer entity group Use the key word asorig to specify the interval of sending local route information Configure BGP peer entity or peer entity group to use route map
237. of master server Address of backup server Public key of server 128 255 16 99 1645 Authentication port 1646 128 255 18 96 1645 Authentication port 1646 maipu Accounting port Accounting port Interface to send or receive T packets aeiy J Hide Radius Address of Master Server The IP address of Radius protocol accounting authentication server preferred by gateway Authentication Port authentication communication port of gateway and Radius accounting authentication server Default 1645 Accounting Port Accounting communication port of gateway and Radius accounting authentication server Default 1646 Radius Address of Backup Server Accounting authenticator is performed by backup server when Radius master server is disabled Public Key of Server Network access server NAS it is a Router such as MP2000 104B Router share the same key with Radius accounting authentication server Configure public key of Radius server port in NAS configuration of Radius server The accounting authentication is feasible only if the public key of network access server has the same configuration with that of Radius accounting authentication server Interface to send or receive packets Network communication interface for packet sending and receiving by gateway and Radius accounting server See details of authentication accounting in the following figure Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 78
238. onfiguration The section explains DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol configuration It is difficult to control a wide network so the most common problem is IP address conflict when IP address is allocate manually The only solution is to allocate IP address manually for client DHCP allocates IP address to client from address pool DHCP can provide other information such as Router IP DNS server address DHCP is not designed to provide diskless workstation with guide information but lighten the burden of administrator who allocates IP address manually DHCP server is able to complete address distribution Q DHCP Service Config DHCP Service Config IP address Subnet mask Enable DHCP service Start address End address Advanced Default gateway 192 168 0 1 DNS address1 DNS address2 Enter the WINS server address which TCP IP needs to query to when parsing the NetBIOS names Lease 3 0 365 days WINS server address Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 102 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 IP Address IP address of internal network interface it is always gateway address of LAN or it is 192 168 0 1 by default Subnet Mask it is 255 255 255 0 by default The configurations of two options can be modified in LAN configure gt LAN interface address page They are default in this page to display configuration information of current internal network address only Tic
239. onfiguration mode router 3 config ospf area 1 nssa To configure area 1 as NSSA area router 3 config ospf redistribute static To redistribute the external routes in the NSSA area Seeing the LSA database of areal on router 2 we can see the corresponding NSSA LSA and can see the corresponding translated external LSA On router 2 the external routes marked as N2 type can be learned on router 1 the external routes marked as E2 are learned Configure Virtual Link router3 s1 0 60 1 1 2 24 router4 s0 0 30 4 1 1 24 s0 0 30 1 1 2 24 As shown in the above figure on the basis of figure 4 10 another router route4 is connected into router 3 connects with router 4 by serial interfaces configured with the PPP protocol router 3 and router 4 belong to the area 2 Thus in order to make routes of area O can interact with routes of area 2 a virtual link should be established between the border router 3 and router 2 so as to connect the area 2 with the area 0 Suppose that the router ID of router 2 is 70 1 1 2 and the router ID of router 3 is 60 1 1 1 the configurations of the two are Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 180 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The configuration of router 2 Command Description router 2 config router ospf 1 To enter the OSPF configuration mode router 2 config ospf area 1 virtual link 60 1 1 1 To specify to establish a virtual link to the peer 6
240. onnections and Sort by total rate Alarm Threshold Value configuration i The alarm threshold value configuration The alarm threshold value configuration 30 oy Utilization The alarm threshold value of current memory utilization rate Range 1 100 Default 90 If the utilization reach this leavel the system will notify alarm anon ie item s The number of NAT used currently The current nat using entry alarm Range 1 53000 Default 4000 If currnt the number of entry uesed exceed this leavel the system will notify alarm eeu kbps The flow of WAN The range is 1 1000000 kbps the current flow valve of WAN is 2000kps by default if the flow valve of WAN exceed this value the system will notify alarm tooo item s The PC connectiong TCP UDP other session total The range is 1 15000 the valve of current TCP UDP session is 1000 by number is default if the number of system TCP UDP session exceed this level the system will notify alarm setting J Reset ee On this interface you can perform alarm threshold configuration for monitoring equipment running The system warms the user when current performance parameters exceed the thresholds Utilization The alarm threshold of current memory utilization rate Range 1 100 Default 90 Number of NAT used currently the threshold of current used NATs Range 1 53000 Default 4000 The flow of WAN The threshold of current WAN flow It is
241. ons on the document usefulness For further queries or Suggestions contact us by e mail overseas maipu com or fax comments to 86 28 85148948 or 85148139 You can visit our website at http www maipu com which comprises interesting subjects such as product knowledge base sales amp support and the Maipu news Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 7 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Hardware MP2000 104B router includes five Ethernet interfaces four FXS ports and one FXO port The appearance and the front back panel are MP2000 104B Appearance MP2000 MP2000 104B hardware features Fixed configurations Dimension WxDxH Working temperature Working humidity Power supply Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information 5 10 100M fast Ethernet ports 4 FXS ports 1 FXO port 1 reset button 245 mm x 200 mm x 65 mm 0 45 10 90 Non condensing AC power supply 100 240V 0 5A 50 60Hz Page 8 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 MP2000 104B Front Panel SYS INUSE WAN LANO LANI LAN CAN MP2000 The indicators from left to right SYS Flickering The system is started or works normally IN USE On At least one phone at the FXS and FXO ports is in use Off No voice ports are in use Flickering for one minute Two IOS are unavailable WAN On WAN channel is connected Flickering WAN channel
242. or neighbor address group name prefix list prefix list name in out no neighbor neighbor address group name prefix list prefix list name in out Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group prefix list name The name of the prefix list in Configure the prefix list to function on the route notified from the neighbor out Configure the prefix list to function on the route notified to the neighbor Default status By default it is disabled neighbor version command The command is used to configure that only specified BGP version BGPv4 is received The no form of the command is used to use the default version neighbor neighbor address version 4 no neighbor neighbor address version Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity 4 The BGP version number Currently it can only be configured as 4 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 196 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 neighbor capability command The command is used to configure the local supported capability notification when the local BGP negotiates with BGP peer entity or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address group name capability dynamic orf prefix list lt both receive send route refresh no neighbor neighbor address group name
243. or press it again and reenter the number if the former one is wrong If transfer user will like to return to communication with calling user during ringing please press hook switch If the user wants to return to communication from transfer process he should not press button and just wait for timeout or he can press hook switch and button to return to communication directly Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 67 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Brief introduction of transfer divert Call forwarding additional services includes Call Forwarding Unconditional Call Forwarding Busy and Call Forwarding No Reply They are all used during call building or used to transfer call to another destination when no user answers the call Characteristics of three call forwarding additional services 1 Call Forwarding Unconditional CFU It can transfer the received call to another number CFU service has no effect on call capability of user Once CFU is started the call will be forwarded independently not restrained by stated of service port 2 Call Forwarding Busy CFB It can transfer the received call to another number when user is busy It is applicable to all calls or to those limited by specific conditions It has no effect on original calling capability of user 3 Call Forwarding No Reply CFNR The user is provided with such functions if using CFNR service if a call to one port cannot be buil
244. or update source command Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Description The IP address of the peer entity The name of the peer entity group The maximum number of hops The value range is 1 255 Page 194 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The command is used to configure the source address used when setting up connection with BGP peer entity or peer entity group and sending update packets or specify the interface address as source address The no form of the command is used to cancel the existing configuration neighbor lt neighbor address group name update source interface ip address no neighbor neighbor address group name update source Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group interface Specify the TCP connection interface ip address The address of a local interface Default status By default use the local output interface address of BGP neighbor address route as the source address neighbor distribute list command The command is used to configure the distribution filtering list applied on the BGP peer entity or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address group name distribute list access list name in out no neighbor neighbor address group name distribute list access list name in out Syntax Description neighbor a
245. or your Internet connection O Fixed Address Line PPPoE Dial up Line O Ethernet Dynamic Address Line Click Next Input username and password Generally speaking they are provided by telecom operators Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN PPPoE Dial up Line Please enter your account and password Username admin Password LLLE Click Next to complete PPPOE dial up line Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 95 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Then it needs to configure VPN It needs to create a tunnel first between device and upstream VPN Server Choose Create a Tunnel in tunnel configuration page of VPN configuration Tunnel Configuration Create a Tunnel Click the Create a Tunnel button to create a tunnel which will be used to protect the dataflow between two gateways Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 96 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The parameters of tunnel configuration are displayed below Tunnel Configuration Name of Tunnel Level of Security Ra Authentication Share Previously v Mode Secret Key e eee Destination Gateway Ip address or domain name any Sign 129 255 80 203 Local gateway Local out interface dialerd w ypha company com Sign Ip address or domain name of destination vpn device Must be unique in the whole network e g vpna or maipu com Must be uniqu
246. ospf originate always metric metric value metric type type value Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information redistributes the default route to the routing area of OSPF can specify the cost the cost type and Page 151 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 route map map name default metric metric value distance distance value ospf external distance value inter area distance value intra area distance value distribute list access list number access list name out routing protocol process id distribute list access list number access list name in host ip address area area id log adjacency changes detail max concurrent dd max value neighbor ip address cost cost value poll interval interval value priority priority ospf abr type cisco ibm shortcut standard overflow database external ospfExtLsdbLimit ospfExitOverflow nterval overflow database max lsa num hard soft passive interface interface name ip address redistribute protocol protocol id metric value metric type type tag value route map name refresh timer time value router id ip address Summary address address mask tag tag value not advertise timers spf delay time hold time Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information route map mapping To specify the cost value of all redistributed routes To Set administration distance of OSPF routes can individu
247. oute After configured as above router 1 and router 2 can learn a summarized external route 77 77 77 0 24 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 177 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Configure External Route Filtering As figure 4 11 there is a static route 88 88 88 88 on router3 the following configuration can be used to filter the static route when redistributing The configuration of router 3 Command router 3 config router ospf 1 router 3 config ospf redistribute static router 3 config ospf distribute list 33 out static router 3 config ospf exit router 3 config ip route 88 88 88 88 255 255 255 255 serial1 0 router 3 config ip route 99 99 99 99 255 255 255 255 serial1 0 router 3 config ip access list standard 33 router 3 config std nacl deny 88 88 88 0 0 0 0 255 router 3 config std nacl permit any Description To enter the OSPF configuration mode To redistribute static routes To filter the static route matching ACL 33 To configure the static route To configure the static route To configure the standard access list To configure the network segment to be denied To configure permit item After configured as above we can see that it only redistributed the static route of 99 99 99 99 but does not generate the external route of 88 88 88 88 Configure Administration Distance of OSPF Route The command distance can be used to modify the administration dist
248. oute priority Priority decreases as the digit increase The preferred voice codec when a call over IP calling a number of this dial peer default is g729 Called Apply index of transform rule to called number Calling Apply number transform to calling number Encode T EE l Username for connecting to SIP server can not modify while protocol is running Password for connecting to SIP server can not modify while protocol password L is running register On the above interface a batch of POTS routes is configured The start voice port is FXS 0 and the end voice port is FXS 3 The start phone number is 401 and the phones increase by 1 according to the port number That is the corresponding phone numbers of ports FXS O FXS 3 are 401 404 Click Apply If the system prompts that the configuration succeeds view the following information via the POTS Config option of Voice Configuration gt Call Route Configuration Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 248 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 QCcall route config VOIP Config POTS Config Index Phone number Port PRI Encode Called Calling register Username password Batch Config 1 401 1 0 10 9729 Yes Yes X 1 402 1 1 10 9729 Yes Yes X 1 403 1 2 10 9729 Yes Yes X 1 404 1 3 10 9729 Yes Yes X ada etzesn back In this way the corresponding phone number of the local FXS port is configured Next we need to
249. outer 2 config interface loopback3 router 2 config if loopback3 ip address 33 33 33 33 To configure the interface address 255 255 255 255 router 2 config if loopback3 exit router 2 config interface loopback4 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 175 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 router 2 config if loopback4 ip address 255 255 255 255 router 2 config if loopback4 exit router 2 config interface loopback5 router 2 config if loopback5 ip address 255 255 255 255 router 2 config if loopback5 exit 33 33 33 44 To configure the interface address 33 33 33 55 To configure the interface address After configured as above the area O generates a 33 33 33 0 24 inter area summary route Configure OSPF Inter Area Route Filtering If some routes belonging to the area 1 on the area border router router 2 cannot be advertised to other areas use the inter area route filtering command area filter list for example The configuration of router 2 Command router 2 config ip access list standard test router 2 config std nacl deny host 44 44 44 44 router 2 config std nacl permit 44 44 44 0 0 0 0 255 router 2 config std nacl exit router 2 config router ospf 1 router 2 config ospf network 44 44 44 0 0 0 0 255 area 1 router 2 config ospf area 1 filter list access test out router 2 config ospf exit router 2 config interface loopback44 router 2 config if loopb
250. pe has no actual meaning so there is no difference whether to specify the encryption type neighbor advertisement interval command The command is used to configure the interval of sending route to BGP peer entity or peer entity group Use the key word asorig to specify the interval of sending local route information The no form of the command is used to recover the default value of the interval of sending route to BGP peer entity or peer entity group neighbor lt neighbor address group name advertisement interval asorig seconds no neighbor neighbor address group name advertisement interval asorig seconds Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity group name The name of the peer entity group seconds The minimum interval of notifying route to the neighbor The value range is 0 600 Default status The default sending interval is 30s Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 192 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 neighbor route map command The command is used to configure the route map applied on the peer entity or peer entity group The no form of the command is used to delete the route map applied on the peer entity or peer entity group neighbor neighbor address group name route map map name in out a re aneor neighbor address group name route map map name in out Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity group na
251. per registration Get it from gatekeeper administrator properly You can input which means to register to the first domain of the gatekeeper by default Port The port discovering the gatekeeper The default value is 1718 Register to Gatekeeper Start registering to realize keeper calling function After registered gatekeeper performs function management on all terminals in H 323 network system such as bandwidth management load balancing authentication management shift between active and passive The letters in yellow on the right of option indicates whether Router registers to gatekeeper successfully Click to delete this gatekeeper configuration Click Advanced configuration to enter the interface of Advanced Configuration of H 323 Protocol Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 47 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Qadvanced Configuration of H323 protocol Advanced configuration Call mode slow No authentication Username is corresponding to H323 ID and password is just the authentication password The time of gateway should synchronize with the gatekeeper it registered SNTP server configuration Bear capability 3100 Hz v Call Divert mode Default mode DTMF mode h245 stri ng t ermC apSet support v Authentication Type of H323 GRQ interval 40 seconds Range 15 90 Default 40 O Start H245 tunnel mode Send ARQ to gatekeeper whe
252. pf is configured at first while the interface is not configured to be up at that time ospf cannot be configured and the error is reported However the version 6 0 x permits to configure as so Description of Commands for Configuring OSPF OSPF requires that all configurations of the OSPF protocol based router the border router and the autonomous system border router need to be consistent Basically they can be divided Thereinto enabling OSPF process is necessary depend on the application conditions and they are optional Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information into the following parts other configurations Page 154 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Enable OSPF Process Similar with other routing protocols in order to enabling OSPF function an OSPF routing process needs to be created Specify the address range related with the process and specify the area the address range belongs to The following commands can be used to complete the function The command router ospf This command enables the OSPF protocol and creates an OSPF routing process after configured this command switch to the OSPF routing configuration mode The no format of the command can be used to disable the OSPF routing process router ospf process id vrf vrf name no router ospf process id Syntax Description process id The number of the OSPF process multiple OSPF processes can be enabled at the same time
253. pgrade task management interface select the desired upgrade task that is tick the desired upgrade task and click Edit Task to edit Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 238 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 the related fields of the current upgrade task Note that the being upgraded task cannot be edited AAD ESA CELLET EES HRB ST wD FERE Fen hes FER AT el le MP2000 104B AC 128 255 168 103 mp2000 1046B mapa 5 2 1 2008 3 3 14 20 45 64 Field description Upgrade type upgrade version upgrade time upgrade bandwidth and auto restart can be modified Upgrade type The options are intact packet system packet and extension packet Intact packet refers to the packet that includes the device program ios file and extended voice file system file refers to the device program ios file extension packet refers to the voice file Upgrade time By default start the upgrade tasks at once You can modify it to start the upgrade task at other time Upgrade bandwidth It is the receiving rate of the device when MP5 server transmits the program files to the device The value range is 1KB s 100MB s Transmission mode Currently only FTP mode is supported Auto Restart Whether to restart the device after the program is upgraded Delete upgrade task On the upgrade task management interface select the desired upgrade task that is tick the desired upgrade task and click Delete Task The b
254. r interface offset list access list name in out offset interface output delay delay interval passive interface interface recv buffer size buf size redistribute bgp connected ospf process id static metric metric route map route map name timers basic update invalid holddown flush version 1 2 ip rip authentication mode text md5 key 0 7 key string key chain key chain name ip rip receive version 1 12 2 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Description To enable RIP protocol and enter RIP Protocol Configuration Mode To enable VRF and enter the RIP protocol VRF configuration mode To Enable route auto summary function of RIP version 2 To configure the default route 0 0 0 0 0 to be notified and set itself as the default gateway To configure the default measurement of routing items when RIP redistributing routing protocols To configure the administration distance of RIP routing To configure RIP route filtering To switch to Interface Configuration Mode To configure the maximum paths of the next hops of RIP load balance To configure the maximum number of the routing items and the number of the warning routing items in RIP routing database To configure the neighbor router which advertises the routing information in the form of unicast To configure the direct interconnection networks or interfaces covered by RIP To configure RIP t
255. r used for registering SIP server Port The port of the group ring Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 74 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The Add Port button is in the active state only after the group ring is added successfully or editing the existing group ring Click it to enter the following port configuration interface On the interface you can select the member ports to be added to the ring group If FXO port is selected the phone number of the FXO port should be configured One ring group can be configured with up to two member ports Callee Group Configuration Add Port port 2 0 FXO Iv Port Phone Number set Retzesn Ea IVR System Configuration IVR Interactive Voice Response user can realize second dial up by dialing called number according to tone after dialing a number to gateway IVR system configuration includes IVR basic configuration and config information of IVR play options IVR configuration is shown below rn VIVR configuration IVR basic configuration Enable IVR IVR record number It s made of digit length is 1 25 empty means not configured yet IVR record time Unit seconds Range 5 60 Default 60 IVR record codec G 729 Register IVR access numbers to gatekeeper or SIP server Enable IVR authentication mE Config information of IVR access number 1001 Enable IVR Tick the Enable IVR check box Otherwise dis
256. r can configure call service configuration services including Enable Disable call transfer service call divert service and call wait service call service configuration Call Transfer configuration call transfer consultation Call Divert Service Call Wait Service Enable call divert service Config the no answer divert time Called number Divert to Call divert mode Configuration aaa cies J Retres Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 65 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Click Call Divert Service or Call Wait Service to perform the switch between call divert service and call wait service Call service configuration Call Transfer configuration Enable call transfer call transfer consultation service Call Divert Service Call Wait Service Enable call wait service Number which has registered the call wait service Configuration 403 x 402 x add Clear Refresh Add a Brief introduction of Call transfer service B calling A called C transfer User A is the one that has right to use call transfer service During communication between user A called user and user B calling user user A can transfer current calling between A and B to new calling between user B and user C User C plays a role as the one to be transferred Once call transfer is completed user B and user C can communicate with each other while user A will no longer communicate
257. r inquiry requires that user A user B and user C can be in the same gateway or different gateways Operation steps of various transfer services Direct transfer User A which initiates the service asks user B to be transferred to wait for a moment When user A performs hook switch operation user B is kept When informed of tone please dial transfer number and end with user A dials call transfer number XX number of user C Then user B will be transferred to user C User A hangs up when system prompts with busy tone If user B dials via XX number of user C and hears ring back tone the communication will be initiated after off hook by user C Call transfer after inquiry User A which initiates the service asks user B to be transferred to wait for a moment When user A performs hook switch operation user B is kept When informed of tone please dial transfer number and end with user A dials call transfer number XX number of user C When dialing via user C and confirming transfer user A hangs up directly to realize communication between user B and C If user C rejects to communicate with B by hanging up directly or user c doesn t answer the call it will be transferred back to communication between B and A The transferred user B only needs to keep original call user C only needs to wait for user B transfer when communication between A and C is finished Go to transfer process by pressing hook switch
258. r routing protocols into the OSPF routing area the router is automatically called the autonomous system border router By default the autonomous system border router doesn t generate a default route to the OSPF routing area but users can compel the autonomous system border router to generate a default route to the OSPF routing area The command default information originate The autonomous system border router redistributes the default route into the routing area of OSPF can specify the cost the cost type and the route mapping Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 165 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 default information originate always metric metric value metric type type value route map map name no default information originate always metric metric value metric type type value route map map name Syntax Description No matter whether a default route exists or not to generate aways a default ASE LSA metric value To Set metric value type value To Set metric type map name To Set routing map name Default status not configured Control the Default Cost of OSPF Interface By default OSPF calculates the cost of the interface according to the bandwidth of the interface For example the cost of the Ethernet interface whose bandwidth is 100M is 1 The formula to calculate the cost of the OSPF interface is reference bandwidth divided by interface bandwidth By default the refern
259. rameters Ftp Server Address 128 255 40 220 Ftp Server port 2111 File name mp2000 bin User name admin Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 232 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Passeword admin Bandwidth 200 Kbps File size 4813566 Byte DownLoaded 2359296 Bytes Clear Upgrade Transaction Syntax Description clear live update Stop the current upgrade transaction and clear FTP parameters Pause Upgrade Transactions Syntax Description pause live update Pause the upgrade transaction and do not clear FTP parameters Execute the Satrt live update command continue the current breakpoint upgrade Re start Upgrade Syntax Description start live update If executing the pause live update command on the current upgrade the command is used to recover the upgrade Upgrade Program via Web On this interface you can upgrade IOS program of the device Ithe IOS program includes web network management program DREAD IOSX A FHEIOSHAFR LY 9S GA GEAR ER ah ERES HEM ASbixe BROS RER EERE Upgrade the IOS application program You can upgrade the application program of the IOS device via web The extension name of the IOS application program is bin such as rp6 iv 8 2 1 L07 i bin Ensure that the IOS program to be upgraded matches with the device You need to restart the device after upgrading IOS application program successfully You can restart the device on the interfac
260. re configuration on routes sent by the router and routes entering the router at the same time clear ip bgp address as number peer group group _ name external ipv4 unicast multicast vrf vrf_name soft Syntax Description All BGP neighbors address Specify IP address of BGP neighbor as number Re set BGP connection matching AS number The value range is 1 65535 group_name The name of Peer group ipv4 unicast Process route information of ipv4 unicast address cluster ipv4 multicast Process route information of ipv4 multicast address cluster vrf_name Specify the name of the vrf whose route information is processed external All EBGP neighbors clear ip bgp in prefix filter command The command is used to inform the BGP neighbor via orf mechanism after the configurations of the local input prefix list change clear ip bgp address as number peer group group_name external ipv4 unicast multicast in prefix filter Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 213 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 All BGP neighbors address Specify IP address of BGP neighbor as number Re set BGP connection matching AS number The value range is 1 65535 group_name The name of Peer group ipv4 unicast Process ipv4 unicast address cluster ipv4 multicast Process ipv4 multicast address cluster pref ix filter The name of prefix filter entering the local external All EBGP neighbors BGP Co
261. remote IP phone via IP network Configure WAN To realize communication with IP phone of H323 port we should allocate a WAN IP address for MP2000 104B router Follow steps below Enter WAN configuration gt Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN from navigation bar and then configure WAN accessing step by step according to wizard First enter the interface Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN This wizard will lead you to connect your device to Internet step by step Step 1 Choose the interface to be configured Step Choose the type that you use to connect to the WAN Step 3 Configure other options basing on the type you have chosen in the Step 2 Click Next to enter Choosing Interface for WAN Connection Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN Choosing Interface for WAN Connection This router can connect to Internet via multi interface Please choose the corresponding interface according to the cable or fibre that you used Choose the interface Choose WAN as interface and click Next to enter the WAN Connection Type interface Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 244 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN WAN Connection Type Choose the type for your Internet connection Fixed Address Line PPPoE Dial up Line Ethernet Dynamic Address Line See three internet connection types for MP2000 104B router from the figure above It tak
262. ress and mask can be summarized to one route and it is advertised by the summarized external Isa This can reduce the size of the ospf link state database For the summarization of the external routes use the command summary address This command summarizes all ase Isas in the network segment to one summary ase Isa and only advertises the summary ase Isa to other routers via asbr The command summary address This command completes the summarization for the external routes of ospf The command no summary address can make the command invalid summary address address mask tag tag value not advertise no summary address address mask tag tag value not advertise Syntax Description address The summarized address mask The mask of the summarized address tag value To Set tag value not advertise To not advertise outside after summarized Default status do not summarize Note This command only takes effect on ASBR to summarize the external routes redistributed by ospf Configure Virtual Link In ospf protocol network the backbone area has to always keep connected and all areas have to connect to the backbone are If the backbone area is divided into two or multiple parts then some destinations is changed to be unreachable In order to guarantee the rules in the above ospf protocol network for the separated backbone area and the area which doesn t connect to the backbone users can configure the virtual link to meet the
263. ription RouterD configure terminal Enter the Global Configuration Mode RouterD config if loopback0 interface s1 0 RouterD config if seriall 0 encapsulation hdlc Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC RouterD config if serial1 0 ip address 195 1 1 1 255 255 2550 RouterD config if seriall 0 interface s2 0 RouterD config if serial2 0 encapsulation hdlc Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC RouterD config if serial2 0 ip address 194 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 RouterD config if serial2 0 exit RouterD config router bgp 200 Enter BGP Configuration Mode RouterD config bgp neighbor 194 1 1 2 remote as 200 Specify AS number of BGP neighbor RouterD config bgp neighbor 195 1 1 2 remote as 200 Specify AS number of BGP neighbor RouterD config bgp exit Note The above explains the dynamic routing protocol BGP About the configuration mode of the physical layer and link layer refer to related sections BGP Monitoring amp Debugging show ip bgp command The command is used to display all BGP route and the related information show ip bgp ipv4 unicast multicast address address prefix length longer prefixes cidr only community list community_list_name exact match filter list filter _list_ name inconsistent as prefix list prefix _list_name quote regexp regexp str _quote regexp regexp str route map map_name Syntax Description ipv4 unicast Display route information in the BGP global ipv4 unicast route t
264. rn to the previous configuration interface click Exit to cancel all the configurations and return to the web homepage or click Next to enter the following configuration interface Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 30 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Configuration Wizard of Qos Dividing VOIP data and user data with VLANs Choose whether or not divide VOIP data and user data with VLAN Divide VOIP data and user data with VLAN Sub interface of VOIP Poe fastethernet0 1 Please select a sub interface to transmit VOIP data VLAN ID 1 Range 1 4094 Sub interface of user a data fastethernetU 2 iv Please select a sub interface to transmit user data VLAN ID 2 Range 1 4094 On the interface divide the sub interface of the WAN port to two VLANSs One sub interface is used to transmit VoIP data and bind VoIP protocol such as SIP protocol the other is used to transmit the user data except for voice data Sub interface of VoIP data It is used to transmit VoIP data and bind VoIP protocol Sub interface of user data It is used to transmit the user data except voice data VLAN ID They are the IDs of the VLANs to which the voice data interface and user data interface are divided You can de select Divide VoIP data and user data with VLAN check box to cancel the VLAN division of the VoIP and user data sub interfaces Click Back to return to the previous configuration interface clic
265. roup name passive neighbor peer_group name capability match neighbor neighbor address attribute as path med next neighbor address collide neighbor address dont neighbor address enforce neighbor address override neighbor address neighbor address strict neighbor address peer_group name unsuppress map map name neighbor neighbor address soo asn nn neighbor neighbor address peer_group name as override Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Configure not to change the attribute in BGP route when forwarding BGP route to the BGP peer entity or peer entity group Configure to perform the connection confliction check when the BGP peer entity or peer entity group is in the connection state Configure not to negotiate with the BGP peer entity or peer entity group about the capability notification Configure the EBGP connection set between the local and BGP peer entity or peer entity group cannot be straight through Configure the BGP connection between the local and BGP peer entity or peer entity group neglects the capability negotiation result Configure the local not to initiate the TCP connection of BGP neighbor to BGP peer entity or peer entity group actively Configure the BGP connection between the local and the BGP peer entity or peer entity group matches capability negotiation result strictly Configure BGP peer entity or peer
266. rt broadcast storm It can be high low highest lowest or uncontrolled It is lowest by default Low allows storm by 20 lowest by 10 high by 30 and highest by 40 Edit perform configuration for port by clicking icon of corresponding port Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 44 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Configuration of port Port Status Priority Duplex Rate Mbps Storm control o mare e 0 1O Mema o apply Restore Default Set PVID correctly according to network VLAN program or result in failed accessing to equipment after modification Click Restore Default to restore port value to factory set value In switch mode Q Switch Port Config Port status Duplex Rate Mbps Full duplex 100 Auto negotiate Auto negotiate Auto negotiate Auto negotiate Full duplex 100 Edit port Configuration of port Port Duplex Rate Mbps o Full duplex Apply Restore Default Voice Configuration MP2000 104B router integrates VoIP function and can provide complete VoIP services for users Protocol Configuration H323 Protocol Configuration Gateway can carry out only one protocol in one interface H 323 protocol or SIP protocol When the user aims to replace H 323 protocol with SIP protocol for configured interface he has to delete all H 323 protocol configurations according to following steps first switch H 323 protocol to blank in Protocol bar T
267. s Command format Live update dest ipaddress port ftp filename ftp username ftp password reload CR bandwidth bandValue CR Commands Syntax Description dest ipaddress IP address of FTP server port FTP port number and the value range is 1 65535 fielname FTP file name Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 231 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 ftp username FTP user name ftp password FTP user password bandValue Bandwidth and the value range is1 1000Kb Command mode privilege mode Application Example Step 1 Check whether the network is connected and whether the device and the FTP server are connected physically Step 2 Run the FTP server that supports breakpoint transmission such as the FTP server provided by MP5 working station of Maipu Step 3 Execute the upgrade command live update 128 255 40 220 2111 ftp mp2000 bin admin admin bandwidth 200 Upgrade starts 14 46 36 LIVEUPDATE Start updating Upgrade ends 14 47 35 LIVEUPDATE Download Complete Note When the upgrade via live upgrade breakpoint transmission mode starts the calls cannot be made for about 30s It is recommended to perform the upgrade at the middle night Other Added Debug switch Syntax Description debug live update The process of writing FLASH in the upgrade debug live update detail The FTP process in the upgrade View FTP Parameters show live update ftp parameters View FTP parameters FTP pa
268. s are completed Router A and Router B start to run RIP Run the command show ip route rip on Router B we can see that Router B has already learned another sub net of Router A R 20 1 1 0 24 120 2 via 10 1 1 1 00 00 06 ethernetO Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 137 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 RIP Route Summarization Configuration In the network topology figure 4 5 configure route summarization on Router A Command Description router A configure terminal To enter Global Configuration Mode router A config interface gigaethernetO To enter the gO interface router A config if gigaethernetO ip address 20 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip address router A config if gigaethernetO interface gigaethernetl To enter the g1 interface router A config if gigaethernet1 ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 To configure the ip address router A config if gigaethernet1 exit To return to Global Configuration Mode router A config router rip To enter the RIP Configuration Mode router A config rip network 20 0 0 0 To specify the network number run by RIP router A config rip network 10 0 0 0 Same as above router A config rip version 2 To configure the RIP version router A config rip auto summary To enable auto summary The configuration of Router B is the same as 4 2 3 1 Run the command show ip route rip on Router B we can see the summary route learned by Router B R
269. s numbers can be set at present grii You can configure several access numbers at the same time Using to separate the different number numbers Each number is made of digit and its length is between 1 and 25 Invalid numbers will not be configured In the access number text box as shown in the above figure you can input multiple IVR access numbers at the same time The IVR system provides abundant voice prompts to guide the operation of secondary dialing service The following is the configuration of the voice prompt Config information of IVR play options Voice files to play Play times Play prompt when busy Play prompt when the second dial is failed Play prompt when the second dial number is not exist Play prompt when the second dial call finished Play prompt when the second dial call is time out Welcome music when user is connecting to IVR As the figure illustrates the terms on the left are the voice files to play while terms on the right are play times of voice files The user should choose one proper parameter according to requirements from four types 1 2 3 or cycle IVR system application Dial extension number Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 76 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 If the user sets IVR access number as 111111 system will inform the user with prompt please dial extension number and end it with it is a prompt by default or the user can make
270. s of server as 192 168 0 2 Rename the application program as MPLO2RT and then put it in work directory of FTP server Connect PC to WAN port of device Power on the device again and hold RESET button at the same time If SYS light is off and IN USE light is on system begins to download program from server Then the user can release RESET button System is started successfully when SYS light is flashing In such case the user can configure system via web Attention based on operation mentioned above the device does not write application program in flash Thus you need to write application program in FLASH via web Please refer to Software Update of the Device for update When using FIP to upgrade device program IP address of WAN port Should be 192 168 0 1 For failed update please check whether there is something wring with the network between device and FTP server Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 240 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 To use web to manage the device after update you need log in to device via LAN port The default address of LAN port should be 192 168 0 1 There is no default IP address for WAN port Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 241 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Typical Applications In The chapter we aim to assist the user to perform basic application configuration of MP2000 104B router via a typical application example of MP200
271. sable the FXO line detection function FXO line detect interval FXO dial out flashhook a0 Unit 20ms Range 10 60 Default 40 It does not take effect unless FXS time FXO linkage is enabled Echo Cancellation Length 32 m Unit ms Default 32 Check UDP Checksum Disable v Default disable Play ringback to caller Disable v Default disable Individual ring Disable v Default disable IP callout indicate Disable v Default disable Total IP call 256 Range lt 0 256 gt Default 256 Playing music when the Disable v Default disabl third party is held abil acre Chinese v Default language is Chinese Make sure the files that correspond to the language which you will choose have been downloaded to the device s flash If not please download first Otherwise it will can t play System prompt language type FXS global configuration Dial space 30 Unit 10ms Range 10 100 Default 30 Flash Hook length 13 Unit 10ms Range 4 100 means i Unit LOms Range 4 100 length upper j lower limit Default 13 AS Default 60 limit FSK Mode v23 mode or bell202 mode These two modes differ from each other by different mark 1 and space 0 frequency DTMF Signal Gain range 31dbm 1dbm default 9dbm Do not change this if not necessary e g DTMF signals sent from FXO port cannot be identified by exterior port because of too low volume Voice Data TOS There are two modes preference se
272. scription The redistributed routing protocols include rip ospf static protocol bgp and connect direct connected route The protocol process number some protocols carry the protogo mia protocol process numbers the range is 1 65535 meere To specify the metric value of the redistributed route the range is 0 16777214 metric type To specify the metric type of the redistributed route type 1 or type 2 To specify the tag value carried by the redistributed route tag value the range is 0 4294967295 To specify the redistributed router to perform route map mapping Default status not configured do not redistribute any protocol route map name The command default metric This command specifies the default cost value of all redistributed routes default metric metric value no default metric metric value Syntax Description To specify the metric value of the redistribute route the range is 0 16777214 Default status not configured adopt the default value metric value Note e Because definitions for the cost among protocols are different the cost of the protocol needs to be translated when redistributing e If the costs of the redistributed routes are no configured for the non default route if it is a BGP route the default cost is 1 other protocols is 20 For the default route if it is learned via the static default route the default cost is 20 the default cost of the default route generated forcibly
273. service Start address End address Advanced WAN Accessing Configuration Guide Enter WAN Accessing Configuration Guide from navigation menu and configure parameters step by step according to guide Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN This wizard will lead you to connect your device to Internet step by step Step 1 Choose the interface to be configured Step 2 Choose the type that you use to connect to the WAN Step 3 Configure other options basing on the type you have chosen in the Step 2 Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN Choosing Interface for WAN Connection This router can connect to Internet via multi interface Please choose the corresponding interface according to the cable or fibre that you used Choose the interface WAN e Generally speaking there are 3 ways to connect to Internet for MP2000 104B Router external network e Fixed Address Line e PPPoE Dial up Line e Ethernet Dynamic Address Line Please choose corresponding WAN Connection Type according to internet accessing type provided by ISP Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 19 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Configuration Wizard of Accessing WAN WAN Connection Type Choose the type for your Internet connection gt Fixed Address Line PPPoE Dial up Line Ethernet Dynamic Address Line Fill in the blanks according to internet accessing type For fixed line type fill in the
274. set summary only Only inform aggregation route Default status None timers bgp command The command is used to configure the sending interval of BGP global keepalive and holdtime timer time The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration timers bgp keepalive interval holdtime no timers bgp keepalive interval holdtime Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 210 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Syntax Description keepalive interval The interval of sending keepalive packets holdtime Holdtime timer time show running config router bgp command The command is used to view the local BGP protocol configuration The command does not have no form show running config router bgp clear ip bgp command The command is used to re set BGP connection after route policy or BGP protocol configuration changes so that the new configured policy can take effect clear ip bgp address as number peer group group name external Syntax Description All BGP neighbors address Specify IP address of BGP neighbor as number Re set BGP connection matching AS number The value range is 1 65535 group_name The name of Peer group external All EBGP neighbor clear ip bgp dampening command The command is used to clear the route flapping attenuation information and the suppression for the suppressed route clear ip bgp ipv4 unicast multicast dampening address address prefix length
275. sion 1 0 The command ip rip authentication This command configures the protocol packet authentication on the interface of RIP version 2 The no format of the command can be used to cancel the protocol packet authentication ip rip authentication mode text md5 key lt 0 7 key string key chain key chain name no ip rip authentication mode text md5 key O 7 key string key chain key chain name Syntax Description mode To configure the authentication mode of the packet authentication on the interface of RIP version 2 text To configure the packet authentication mode on the interface of RIP version 2 as the plain text authentication mode should be used by combining with key or key chain md5 To configure the packet authentication mode on the interface of RIP version 2 as the MD5 authentication mode should be used by combining with key or key chain key To configure the password of the packet authentication on the interface of RIP version 2 0 To configure the password of the packet authentication s plain text mode on the interface of RIP version 2 7 To configure the password of the packet authentication s cipher text mode on the interface of RIP version 2 It is used for script running when enabling the password encryption service Users should not configure the command key string To configure the password character string of the packet authentication on the interface of RIP version 2 key chain To co
276. sk 255 255 252 0 Default Gateway 128 255 19 254 Enable Gateway Monitor No Preferred DNS server 10 0 0 10 Alternate DNS server 10 0 0 11 Configure Protocol In the last step we have performed WAN configuration for MP2000 104B router but it is impossible to realize WAN communication only based on it MP2000 104B router supports H323 protocol and SIP protocol Now we take H323 protocol as the example to configure protocol for remote IP phone communication Enter the Voice Configuration gt Protocol Configuration interface in navigation bar Protocol config Protocol Hone Choose a wanted protocol from the drop down list There are three options none H323o0col and SIP protocol In this example we choose H323 protocol The following figure illustrates configuration given by system after choosing H323 protocol Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 246 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Protocol config Protocol H 323 protocol configuration Binding interface The interface on which the H323 protocol is running H323 ID Password It s used when the gatekeeper need to authenticate the gateway ee The interval of sending keep alive packets from gateway to gatekeeper Units Range 30 3600 Default 60 Number transition When making a call via the gatekeeper the callee number will be translated rule following this rule Keep alive time PSTN prefix of Gatekeeper c
277. ss is not in a same sub net Users need to use the command ip route peer address to configure the peer IP address of the interface and configure the static route of the address and then the local end can learn routes from peer normally The command offset list Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 128 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 This command configures RIP to modify the measurement of the specified routes which can revise the learned routes or the notified routes The no format of the command can be used to recover to the default measurement of RIP routes offset list access list name in out offset interface no offset list access list name in out offset interface Syntax Description access list name To configure the access list name for routing Here only the standard access list is Supported in To configure RIP to modify the measurement of the learned routes out To configure RIP to modify the measurement of routes notified to outside offset To configure the added offset value for the modified measurement of the specified route The value range is 0 16 interface To configure the name of the interface on which RIP modifies the measurement of the specified route Default status use the default measurement Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode The command output delay This command configures the minimum sending interval among each packet in a RIP update This command is
278. ss list will be transferred to a address in address pool for sending The access list only gives access to addresses that have been transferred An access list that allows too many address accessing will result in unexpected fault System will prevent some viruses or Trojan data packet from accessing by defining access list port Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 107 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 NAT Translation Parameter Configuration On this interface the user can Set maximum number of translated NATs NAT translation parameter config NAT translation parameter config 10000 Maximum of NAT l The maximum of NAT translation depending on the capability of memory Range 8000 23000 Default 10000 translation Flux Dynamic amp L3 Throughput Limit Configuration On this interface the user can configure flux dynamic and Lay 3 via put limit including Max receive flux dynamic limit max send flux dynamic limit TCP UDP ICMP other layer 3 forward via put limit TCP UDP ICMP other layer 3 to upper via put limit Advanced Configuratoin gt Flux dynamic and layer 3 throughput limit configuration Max flux dynamic limit Max receive flux dynamic limit Unit Mbps Range 1 100 Max send flux dynamic limit I Unit Mbps Range 1 100 Whole layer 3 throughput limit l UDP layer 3 TCP layer 3 forward Unit PPS forward ie throughput limit Range 60 1000000
279. ss we use in daily work Enter the fax service configuration interface by clicking Voice Configuration gt Fax Service Configuration in navigation bar Fax service configuration Fax service configuration Enable the global T 38 capability of this gateway T38 fax mode UDPTL Maximal speed Unit kbps default 14 4 High a redundancy L Range 0 3 Default 0 Low n d 1 S Range 0 5 Default 0 rors emm through code Enable the Error Check Mode of T38 fax It takes effect only when both the facsimile terminals of the two sides of the communication have Ecm function There are two fax modes for MP2000 104B router T32 fax mode and transparent transmission mode We will perform configurations here for these two fax modes In the figure above tick Enable global T 38 capability of this gateway check box to make all gateways support T38 fax capability Or the user can enable T38 capability under some dial peer only or disable T38 capability under some dial peer or enable transparent transmission mode according to requirement In such case Enable global T 38 capability of this gateway means to check fax capability and its type according to specific settings of each dial peer Click Voice Config gt Call Route Config to display following interface ae Call route config WOIP Config POTS Config Index Phone number Target Encode Called Calling Fax Backup Config 2008 GW 128 255 16 97 g729 w x P
280. status DHCP service status Allocable addresses Allocated addresses Remain addresses 254 0 254 Allocated information of address User IP address MAC address Status Refresh Back Bost ped On this interface the user can view allocable addresses allocated addresses and remain addresses of DHCP server In the second table it displays allocated information of address and used time If there is a binding existed in user binding system will find out binding user name accorded with MAC according to MAC address Otherwise MAC address bar displays DHCP service enabling or disabling or parameter modification will only take effect after the user clicks the Apply button static Address Translation Configuration NAT allows unregistered IP address to access Internet network NAT is configured in a MP2000 104B Router which connects a internal network and a external network that is similar to Internet Before sending grouping data to external network NAT translates local address internally to the only IP address of external network To better understand NAT configuration define some relevant terms beforehand Local Address IP address that is allocated to internal network It may not be legal address allocated by NIC or ISP Global Address legal address allocated by NIC or ISP that displays one or several internally local IP addresses to external network Static translation is to build a one to one mapping between internal
281. std nacl deny host 44 44 44 45 To configure the deny address router 2 config std nacl permit any To configure the permit address router 2 config std nacl exit router 2 config router ospf 1 To enter the OSPF configuration mode router 2 config ospf area 0 filter list access maipu in To apply the access list name maipu to the filtering of in direction of areaO router 2 config ospf exit After configured as above the area 0 cannot learn the route 44 44 44 45 32 of the areal but can only learn the route 44 44 44 46 32 of areal Configure to Redistribute the External Routes and Summarize As shown in figure 4 11 area 1 is still a normal OSPF area router3 is configured with continuous static routes the next path is s1 0 router3 redistributes static routes and summarizes them The configuration is as follow The configuration of router 3 Command Description router 3 config router ospf 1 To enter the OSPF configuration mode router 3 config ospf redistribute static To redistribute the static routes router 3 config ospf summary address 77 77 77 0 255 255 255 0 To summarize the redistributed static routes router 3 config ospf exit router 3 config ip route 77 77 77 77 255 255 255 255 seriall O To configure the static route router 3 config ip route 77 77 77 88 255 255 255 255 seriall O To configure the static route router 3 config ip route 77 77 77 99 255 255 255 255 seriall O To configure the static r
282. t Select the FXS port radio button and there will be a drop down list with all FXS ports of the current gateway You can select the FXS port that FXO port is bound to from the drop down list When PSTN dials the phone number of the FXO port the gateway automatically searches the phone number configured on the FXS port that the FXO port is bound to and initiates a call If configured as number there are three kinds of filling modes It can be configured as any complete number of FXS port on MP2000 104B router such as 401 It can be business number of some business configured by MP2000 104B router Take IVR second dialing access number as an example On the premise of IVR access number if user dials exterior line number of FXO by PSTN phone it will be transferred to the IVR voice interactive system of the gateway directly Or the user can leave it blank When PSTN user dials FXO port he will hear long ring back tone that reminds you of dialing extension of MP2000 104B router Fill the blank with a connection plar type and save it Call route Configuration Click Voice Configuration gt Call Route Configuration in navigation bar to display following interface Choose port FXO 0O from the Voice Port drop down list We configure FXO here as trunk interface to connect with telecom PSTN network Then the user can dial original exterior line number via MP2000 104B router See the configuration in the following figure Maipu Confident
283. t administrator are admin the username and password of common administrator are guest Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 111 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Navigation from MasterPlan to WEB Network Management Select MP2000 104B device from the topology view and right click to display menus BHP TARER BR nemi el gE MP2000 1 SNMP HT Ctri SHC Ctrl C WFE Di Delete FER F2 IRER BEME 128 255 16 02 TERN Tt es TERE FETH tee ee EE a e Trapith Sysloge Choose Use WEB NMS from the right click menus If the current device is configured with the user name and password for logging in to the web network management the user name and password are introduced as the parameters for logging in to the web NMS After passing the authentication enter the homepage of web NMS directly and login dialog box is not displayed again If the current device is not configured with user name and password for logging in to the web network management but MP5 sets the default user name and password for logging in to the web network management the default user name and password are introduced as the parameters for logging in to web network management After passing the authentication enter the homepage of web NMS directly and login dialog box is not displayed again Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 112 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 If the current d
284. t successfully during certain period the call will be directed to another port Call Divert Configuration Click config the no answer divert time hyperlink under Call divert config to configure no answer divert time Config the no answer divert time Configure no answer expiry time before Unit second Range 20 60 Default 30 transfer Click Enable call divert service checkbox to start call divert service Click Add to add a call divert service Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 68 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Call service configuration hh Call Divert configuration Called number Usable local number Divert to 02061257302 Divert unconditionally can not exist with the other two divert mode divert when busy or Divert if no answer at the same time Divert when busy J Divert when no answer Divert unconditionally Divert Call divert mode unconditionally can not exist with the other two divert mode divert when busy or Divert if no answer at the same time canes Called Number choose a feasible local number Divert to the number divert to The router number match rule allows complete number match or prefix match Call Divert Mode configure divert conditions Application of Call Divert 1 Call divert takes effect automatically after configuration rather than manual application 2 When the calling and the called are not in the same gateway divert will not su
285. ta from MP2000 104B is only transmitted to port 2 while user data is only transmitted to port 3 In such case voice data and user data have separated accesses to network It should be in switch mode Once voice data separation configuration takes effect PC has access to the gateway directly via LAN interface but PC should be voice VLAN for WAN interface accessing MP2000 104B Router supports 16 VLAN settings with VLAN ID range from 1 4094 If low four digits of two VLAN IDs are the same the system regards it as ID conflict Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 41 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 VLAN Configuration MP2000 104B router can perform VLAN configuration only in route mode The VLAN configuration interface is Q vlan configuration Configuration information of Vian Vian ID The Vian member Description Configuration 1 UnTag 0 1 2 3 Tag CPU default Xe By default the port SwitchethernetO is bound to VLAN1 so MP2000 104B has the VLAN with ID as 1 at first VLAN 1 can be edited but cannot be deleted Click Add to create a new VLAN The configuration interface is Vian ID Vlan ID range 1 4094 The Vian O Poto O Poti Portt2 CF Port3 UntTag member F Poto F Poti CI Port2 F Port3 Tag Description Most 31 characters or 15 chinese characters can be entered Vian ID It is the ID of a VLAN Vlan member The VLAN port member in a VLAN For MP2000 104B t
286. table in order to restrain some routes from being added the following command can be used to filter The command distribute list in This command permits or forbid to add some routes into the core routing table according to the function of the access list distribute list access list number access list name in no distribute list access list number access list name in Syntax Description access list number The standard access list number the range is 1 1000 access list nam The standard access list name Default status not configured Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 171 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Restart OSPF Process The following command can be used to clear all database neighbor status interface stuats and routes of the present OSPF process and restart OSPF to set up neighbor and calculate routes The command clear ip ospf process This command resets the OSPF process clear all data structures of ospf and permit OSPF process again Execute in enable mode clear ip ospf process id process Default status do not execute Examples of Configuring OSPF Enable OSPF Process ae router 1 gt f0 70 1 1 1 24 fo fO 70 1 1 2 24 router2 yaad _fasey router3 s0 0 30 1 1 1 24 s0 0 30 1 1 2 24 Illustration In the configuration figure router 1 connects with router 2 via Ethernet ports router2 connects with router3 via serial ports encapsulat
287. ter 1 LAN can apply such tunnel and policy IP address and mask should be local address and mask Choose subnet for destination as well IP address and mask should be LAN address and mask of VGK voice gatekeeper Based on tunnelO we create previously click Apply to apply this policy to tunnel0 Thus VPN communication has been built between MP2000 104B Router 1 and LAN of gatekeeper Similarly another policy should be created for VPN communication between MP2000 104B Router 1 and MP2000 104B Router 2 Policy settings Policy name poli cyl eg Market department to financial department Protocol IP poi Subnet subnet hast Subt iii IP address 192 168 16 0 Mask 255 see e g 255 255 255 0 or the number of bits of mask 24 Destination Subnet subnet host IP address 192 168 17 0 Mask 258 sel e g 255 255 255 0 or the number of bits of mask 24 bapi tunnel0 tunnel The name is defined by user The configurations of protocol and local are similar to that of policy 1 Fill destination IP address and mask with LAN address and mask of MP2000 104B Router 2 and then apply to tunnelO Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 98 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Thus VPN configuration in MP2000 104B Router 1 is completed Take similar steps to configure MP2000 104B Router 2 For voice data protection the interface registering to gate
288. ter C Here users need to specify the version number for sending on the interface of router A The configuration of Router A Command router A configure terminal router A config interface gigaethernetO router A config if gigaethernet0O ip address 20 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 router A config if gigaethernetO ip rip receive version 1 router A config if gigaethernet0O ip rip send version 1 router A config if gigaethernet0 interface gigaethernetl router A config if gigaethernet1 ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 router A config if gigaethernet1 exit router A config router rip router A config rip network 20 0 0 0 router A config rip network 10 0 0 0 router A config rip version 2 Description To enter Global Configuration Mode To enter the gO interface To configure the ip address To specify to receive RIP packets of version 1 on the g0 interface To specify to send RIP packets of version 1 on the g0 interface To enter the g1 interface To configure the ip address To return to Global Configuration Mode To enter the RIP Configuration Mode To specify the network number run by RIP Same as above To configure RIP version The configuration of Router B is the same as 4 2 3 1 The configuration of Router C Command router C configure terminal router C config interface ethernetO router C config if ethernetO ip address 20 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 router C config router rip router C config rip
289. th attribute in the BGP route med The med attribute in the BGP route next hop The next hop attribute in the BGP route neighbor collide established command The command is used to configure to perform the connection confliction check when the BGP peer entity or peer entity group is in the connection state The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address peer_group name collide established no neighbor lt neighbor address peer_group name collide established Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity peer group name The name of the peer entity group neighbor dont capability negotiate command The command is used to configure not to negotiate with the BGP peer entity or peer entity group about the capability notification The no form of the command is used to cancel the configuration neighbor neighbor address peer _group name dont capability negotiate no neighbor neighbor address peer _group name dont capability negotiate Syntax Description neighbor address The IP address of the peer entity peer _group name The name of the peer entity group Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 201 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 neighbor enforce multihop command The command is used to configure the EBGP connection set between the local and BGP peer entity or peer entity group cannot be straight through The no
290. th need to configure the area 1 as the stub area If users want to configure MD5 authentication password on the interface the MD5 authentication passwords of the two connected interfaces have to be the same The configuration of router 2 Command Description router 2 config router ospf 1 To enter the OSPF configuration mode router 2 config ospf area 1 authentication message digest To configure routes in area 1 need to process the MD5 authentication router 2 config ospf area 1 stub To specify area 1 as the stub area router 2 config ospf exit router 2 config interface serial0 0 router 2 config if serial0 0 ip ospf message digest key 1 md5 0 To configure the MD5 authentication maipu password of the interface router 2 config if serial0 0 exit The configuration of router 3 is the same as router2 After configured as stub area we can see that router3 generates a default route Configure OSPF Inter Area Route Summarization If there are multiple continuous addresses which belong to area 1 on the area border router router2 the the route summarization can be configured For example The configuration of router 2 Command Description router 2 config router ospf 1 To enter the OSPF configuration mode router 2 config ospf network 33 33 33 0 0 0 0 255 area 1 To specify OSPF interface and area router 2 config ospf area 1 range 33 33 33 0 24 To summarize the internal routes of area 1 router 2 config ospf exit r
291. the CA root i ee validity Edit Delete name address type validating period minute certificate Confirm Get the CA root mapoo 128 255 720 201 mpcms on on reor aaa f p P certificate x Certificate Settings Click the Create CA trust domain button to create a new CA trust field Click the Apply certificate button to apply a certificate Create CA trustcdomain Apply certificate Click Create CA trustdomain to configure a new CA trust domain Configure CA trust domain CA name e g MAIPI Certification E TA server address select Windows server 2000 7003 certificate server CRL auto Update period f Unitiminute Fange 0 655325 Default 0 minute Cancel c validating Period of c validity Confirm Turnon Turn off Turnon Turn off CA Name name of a CA trust domain Certification Server Address address of certification service Select Certificate Server currently the CA servers that support on line certificate application are MPSec CMS CA CTCA and Windows server 2000 2003 CRL Auto update Period on the premise of accurate system clock configured with period of validity confirm system performs update automatically according to next publication time included in CRL update period of local configuration It is O by default which indicates not update automatically Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 91 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0
292. the network management station cannot perform any operations in the VoIP gateway The access right specifies the operation right that the SNMP management station with the community name has for the managed devices The rights include Read and Write TRAP host name table includes the host name and the community name The host name can be configured as the name or IP address of the host of the SNMP trap packets sent by the receiving device Usually the IP address is the address of the network management work station The community name specifies the community to which the management station receiving TRAP packets It can be the same as or different from the community name in the SNMP community name table Click 8 and in the Edit line to edit and delete the corresponding item Click the Add community name and Add host name buttons to add the items in the SNMP community name table and TRAP host name table The community name access right and the IP address of the host receiving the TRAP packets need to be configured only when the SNMP agent is enabled so when the gateway does not start the SNMP agent you cannot configure the parameters Currently web interface supports only some SNMPv2 configurations If you want to configure the SNMPv1i or SNMPv3 parameters and other SNMPv2 parameters telnet to the device and use the shell interface to configure The host receiving the TRAP packets can be configured as the host name or IP address When conf
293. tion Dynamic translation is to build a one to one mapping between internal local address and internal global address pool Click to delete relevant dynamic address translation configuration Dynamic address translation config Dynamic address translation Access list Global address Config Sys_PermitAll_dialerO interface dialerO x Click Add to pop up configuration interface Access list Select access list defined already the soure address of packet which filtered according to the rule of access list will be conversed as inner address If there are none define anew access list Global address Specify interface The IP address of selected interface will used as Global address Custom global address pool ee Access List the terms in pull down list are defined available access lists The source address of data packet filtered by access list will be translated Specify global address by two ways Specify Interface choose an external network port from pull down as global address The source address of data packet filtered by access list is translated to IP address of external network If there are several successive global IP addresses you can define a global address pool The internal address uses the address in the address pool to communicate with the external network Custom Global Address Pool input start address end address and mask of global address pool The data packet source address filtered by acce
294. tion Page 88 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Policy settings Policy name policy e g Market department to financial department Protocol v Local Subnet x vv subnet host IP address Mask 255 255 255 0 e g 255 255 255 0 or the number of bits of mask 24 Destination Subnet IP address Mask 255 255 255 0 e g 255 255 255 0 or the number of bits of mask 24 Apply to Not v Atar Forward Refuse Forward policy v policy Policy Name system will fill in with default automatically or the user can modify it according to requirement Protocol protocol types of policy IP TCP UDP ICMP and IGMP Input port numbers of source interface and destination interface when apply TCP and UDP protocols The port number can be any or an arbitrary value adopted from 1 to 65535 or a range from 1 to 65535 Policy settings Policy name policy e g Market department to financial department Protocol Ir E Local Subnet x subnet host IP address Mask p55 255 255 0 e g 255 255 255 0 or the number of bits of mask 24 Destination s bnet subnet host IP address Mask Bss 255 255 0 e g 255 255 255 0 or the number of bits of mask 24 Apply to Wot use x tunnel Forward Refuse Forward policy policy Local Subnet Host types of target to be protected by local port It can one of subnet host or any When the user chooses subnet the system w
295. tions referenced to this list are disabled The user can create a new access list of the same name to recover it Click Delete behind some rule directly to delete this rule For the access list bound to interface to delete this list means deleting all bindings of this list in all interfaces Click New List to configure a new access list the user can bind this access list to a interface inwardly or outwardly to filter data packet when creating access list Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 100 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 List Name List Description you can add description for this access list here Included Rules Action control rule adapt data package is permit or is deny pass Protocol choose the adapted protocol Source Address any e g 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 any means any address Source Port To 1 65535 Destination al a f ior g 5 i i oe Address ee e g 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 any means any address Feoi C to 65535 Ol Binding to interface Cerir J cancet List Name It is the name of the access list The first character cannot be numbers The name had better be related with the function of the access list List Description It is the access list comment It is used to describe the function and meaning of the access list Included rules Action It is the operation performed after a packet matches
296. to cancel the function bgp deterministic med no bgp deterministic med Default status By default it is disabled bgp client to client reflection command The command is used to configure allowing BGP route reflector to forward the route information received by a BGP route reflector client to other BGP route reflector client The no form of the command is used to prohibit BGP route reflector from forwarding the route information received by a BGP route reflector client to other BGP route reflector client bgp client to client reflection no bgp client to client reflection Default status By default it is reflected bgp log neighbor changes command The command is used to display prompt information when the neighbor statue changes The no form of the command is used to cancel displaying the prompt information bgp log neighbor changes no bgp log neighbor changes Default status By default the prompt information is not displayed bgp scan time command The command is used to configure the interval of the local BGP process scanning BGP RIB The no form of the command is used to recover the default value bgp scan time time no bgp scan time Syntax Description time The interval the value range is 0 60 Default status The default value is 60s Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 207 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 address family command The command is used to activate a addr
297. to A When user A calls B B is ringing Assume that GW2 starts FXS remote ring back function when GW2 rings B it will send similar ring back tone to user A after connecting AB medium access via negotiation with GW1 In such case user A can hear ring back tone Individual ring Whether to enable individual ring function After enabling the function the gateway distinguishes the IP calls and non IP calls via ring modes By default the function is disabled IP callout indicate Whether to Enable IP callout prompt By default it is disabled When it is enabled there are two parameters IP callout indicate interval and continue Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 83 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 IP callout indicate Enable Default disable IP callout indicate 200 E Unit ms Range lt 100 500 gt Default 200 continue IP callout indicate 50 Unit s Range lt 30 120 gt Default 60 interval IP callout indicate continue The unit is ms value range is 100 500 the default value is 200 IP callout indicate interval The unit is ms value range is 30 120 the default value is 60 Total IP call IP calls include incoming IP call and outgoing IP calls O means prohibiting IP calls Playing music when the third party is held After enabling the function the local gateway plays music to the held party after the gateway phone receives the holding signals Otherwise the re
298. to resolve the packet loss problem when a high speed interface sending the RIP protocol packets to a low speed interface The no format of the command can be used to recover the minimum sending interval to the default value output delay delay interval no output delay delay interval Syntax Description delay interval To configure the minimum sending interval value among each packet in a RIP update The unit is millisecond and the value range is 8 50 Default status delay interval 0 no minimum interval restriction Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode The command passive interface This command is to configure the interface which restrains from sending packets The interface only receives the route updating packets but doesn t send them The no format of the command can be used to cancel the interface which restrains from sending packets passive interface interface no passive interface interface Syntax Description interface To configure the interface name of the interface which restrains from sending packets Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 129 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Default status the interface which restrains from sending packets of RIP is not specified Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode Note Passive interface doesn t restrain from sending the route updating to neighbor by unicast This command can be combined with the command neighbor to us
299. twork 1 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 Configure the network to which the BGP is sent RouterA config bgp network 2 2 2 0 255 255 255 0 Configure the network to which the BGP is sent RouterA config bgp neighbor 192 1 1 2 remote as 200 Specify AS number of BGP neighbor RouterA config bgp neighbor 193 1 1 2 remote as 200 Specify AS number of BGP neighbor RouterA config bgp exit Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 220 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 B RouterB configuration RouterB configure terminal Enter the Global Configuration Mode RouterB config interface serial1 0 RouterB config if seriall 0 encapsulation hdlc Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC RouterB config if seriall 0 ip address 192 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 RouterB config if seriall 0 clock rate 9600 RouterB config if seriall 0 interface s2 0 RouterB config if serial2 0 encapsulation hdlc Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC RouterB config if serial2 0 clock rate 9600 RouterB config if serial2 0 exit RouterB config router bgp 200 Enter BGP Configuration Mode RouterB config bgp neighbor 194 1 1 1 remote as 200 Specify AS number of BGP neighbor RouterB config bgp neighbor 194 1 1 1 next hop self Set its own address as the next hop RouterB config if serial2 0 ip address 194 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 221 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 RouterC config
300. twork Management Protocol SNMP is a standard protocol for managing Internet It is to ensure that the management information can be transmitted between the network management station and the managed devices Agent It is convenient for the system administrator to manage the network system For the details pf SNMP protocol refer to the materials about TCP IP Enter the interface for configuring SNMP parameters via Navigation gt System Management gt Configuration of SNMP parameters Configuration of SNMP parameters Configuration of SNMP parameters Start the SNMP Agent Community name and its access right Community name Access right public Read and Write 128 2655 16 99 Read and Write Host name or IP Address of Trap and the community name the TRAP uses Host name Community name Community name 128 2655 16 99 Access right Read and Write Start the SNMP Agent Tick the check box and the network management agent process on the VoIP gateway is started The SNMP network management software can manage the VoIP gateway via the SNMP agent SNMP community name table includes two configuration items that is community name and access right The community name specifies the community to which the VoIP gateway is added The community name Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 116 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 should be the same as that on the network management work station Otherwise
301. ty is higher The no format of the command can be used to recover the administration distance of RIP routes to the default value distance distance no distance distance Syntax Description distance To configure the administration distance value of RIP routes The value range is 1 255 Default status distance 120 Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode The command distribute list This command configures the RIP route filtering which can be used to filter routes which are learned or notified to outside the no format of the command can be used to cancel the RIP route filtering distribute list access list name prefix prefix list name in out interface no distribute list access list name prefix prefix list name tn out interface Syntax Description access list name To configure the standard access list name of the RIP route filtering Here only the standard access list is supported Prefix list name To configure the prefix list name of the RIP route filtering In To configure to filter the learned routes Out To configure to filter routes that are notified to outside interface To configure the interface using the filtering configuration Default status do not filter routes Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode The command maximum paths This command configures the maximum number of the next hop s paths of RIP load balance the no format of the command can be used to recover the maximum nu
302. ubnet Mask fixed subnet mask Type of Max Connections Limit it includes Default limit Custom limit and Not limit Max Connections In not limited mode the max connections should be input The value range is 100 20000 Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 38 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Enable max connections limit of single PC The max connections limit of single PC cannot take effect unless the user enables this option Default connections limit of single PC The default connections of a single PC Flow Limit of Single PC Single PC s receiving flow limit If disabled the single PCs receiving flow will not be controled but PCs via IP Single PC s receiving flow limit i Range 2 12500 KBps Single PC s sending flow limit If disabled the single PCs sending flow will not be controled but PCs via IP Single PC s sending flow limit 64 Range 2 12500 KBps Single PC s flow limit IP address Sending flow limit KBps Receiving flow limit KBps Configure Set single PC s flow limit IP address Sending flow limit Unit kBps Rang 2 12500 Receiving flow limit Unit kBps Rang 2 12500 Single PC s receiving flow limit If this option is configured the receiving flow of all the PCs on the device is controlled Single PC s sending flow limit If this option is configured the sending flow of all the PCs on the device is controlled The Single PC s
303. up dial peer when current IP link is faulty IP switch to another IP dial peer of different configuration and re route with original called number Prefix switch to another IP dial peer of different configuration and re router with new called number which is created by adding prefix to the original called number PSTN switch to PSTN dial peer of different configuration including POTS of FXO port and re route with original called number Prefix switch to PSTN dial peer of different configuration including POTS of FXO port and re router with new called number which is created by adding prefix to the original called number Perform POTS configuration by clicking Add in POTS Configuration Qcall route config POTS dial peer config Index 3 Range 1 100 Route phone number matching rule can configure completely phone Phone number number matching or prefix phone number matching Use x present for a digit use present for any digits of any length e g 028x present for any number that match prefix 028 Start voice port FXS 0 v End voice port number increase Route priority 10 Priority decreases as the digit increase gT29 v The preferred voice codec when a call over IP calling a number of this dial peer default is g729 Called v Apply index of transform rule to called number Calling E v Apply number transform to calling number Encode EEEREN Username for connecting to SIP server ca
304. uration RouterC configure terminal Enter the Global Configuration Mode RouterC config interface serial1 0 RouterC config if serial1 0 encapsulation hdlc Encapsulate the link layer protocol HDLC RouterC config if serial1 0 ip address e 255 255 255 0 RouterC config if seriall 0 clock rate 9600 RouterC config if seriall 0 interface s2 0 EE RouterC config if serial2 0 ip address 193 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 RouterC config if serial2 0 clock rate 9600 RouterC config ip prefix list 1 permit 1 1 1 0 24 Set prefix list RouterC config route map localpref permit 10 Set route map RouterC config route map match ip address prefix list 1 Use the prefix list in route map to match RouterC config route map set local preference 200 Set local priority RouterC config route map exit RouterC config route map set local preference 100 pomama O RouterC config router bgp 200 RouterC config bgp neighbor 193 1 1 1 remote as 100 Specify AS number of BGP neighbor RouterC config bgp neighbor 195 1 1 1 remote as 200 Specify AS number of BGP neighbor RouterC config bgp neighbor 195 1 1 1 next hop self Set its own address as the next hop ee bgp neighbor 193 1 1 1 route map localpref Apply route map localpre to the input route of the 193 1 1 1 RouterC config bgp exit Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 222 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 RouterD configuration Command Desc
305. ured with up to 50 ring groups The FXS and FXO ports of the device allow to be configured as the ports of the ring group When configuring FXO port you should specify the corresponding phone number Each ring group allows to be configured with up to two ports If the group contains the FXO port the external line connected to the FXO port needs to provide the reverse polarity signals and the FXO port needs to Enable configuration of checking reverse polarity Signals Click Add Group to enter the following configuration interface Input the information of the new ring group on the interface and click Set Qcallee Group Configuration Enable Group ID 3 Group Phone Number Cl Register to gatekeeper or SIP server Set username and password Username Password Ports List port Port Phone Number configuration Enable Group Enable disable the ring group ID The serial number of the ring group Group Phone Number The group ring number matched with the called number Register to gatekeeper or SIP server Enable disable group ring number register to SIP register server or gatekeeper By default it is enabled Set username and password Whether to configure the user name and password of the group number for registering SIP server The username and password can be configured only when the SIP protocol is not in the register state Username and password The username and password of the group numbe
306. utes in RIP ospf To configure to redistribute routes of OSPF protocol in RIP process id To configure the protocol processing number of OSPF protocol s routes which is redistributed in RIP static To configure to redistribute the static routes in RIP metric To configure the measurements of other protocol s routes which are redistributed in RIP The default value is 1 metric To configure the measurement value of other protocol s routes which are redistributed in RIP The value range is 0 16 route map To configure the route map of other protocol s routes which are redistributed in RIP route map name To configure the route map name of other protocol s routes which are redistributed in RIP Default status do not redistribute routes of other protocols Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode Note 1 If the measurement value is not specified when configuring redistribution users can use the measurement configured by the command default metric If there is no measurement configured by the command default metric users can use the default measurement value 2 In RIP redistribution the route map route map can match two attributes the destination sub net address match ip address and route tag match tag users can Set two attributes route tag set tag and metric set metric 3 The sources of routing items in RIP database comprise the redistributed routes of other protocols the direct connected routes cover
307. uthentication password etc Virtual Link support the virtual links to backbone area Not so Stubby Area support NSSA and obey rfc3101 Demand Circuit support demand circuit obeys rfc1793 The function for controlling database overflow obeys rfc1765 Description of OSPF Basic Commands The commands of OSPF can be divided into three classes the commands for configuring OSPF process the commands for configuring OSPF area the commands for configuring OSPF interface Description of Commands for Configuring OSPF Process Command Description Config mode To Enable OSPF process or Enable OSPF process config ower Seok moes i m from vrf we suggest that one vrf only be ME ae configured with one OSPF process after configured the command switch to the OSPF routing configuration mode To specify the range of the interface addresses config ospf to be covered by OSPF the interface whose IP network network id wildmask ae i ee areas address is in the address range is added into the OSPF routing process the routing information of the interface is managed by OSPF clear ip ospf process id process To restart the OSPF process enable aooe Weerancenandwice To Set bandwidth value to calculate the cost can config ospf ret bandwidth choose from the parameter range of 1 4294967 the default value is 100 capability opaque To support transparent Isa config ospf default information The autonomous system border router config
308. vrf name To specify vrf name Enable OSPF process from VRF we suggest that one vrf is only configured with one OSPF process Default status do not run the OSPF protocol Note The old versions before 5 1 x do not permit to enable only one ospf process and no interface is in up status that is when initializing a router the ospf is configured at first while the interface is not configured to be up at that time ospf cannot be configured and the error is reported However the version 6 0 x permits to configure as so The command network This command specifies the range of the addresses to be covered by OSPF process and the OSPF area the address range belongs to The no format of the command can be used to cancel the specified covered addresses network ip address wildcard mask area area id no network ip address wildcard mask area area id Syntax Description ip address wildcard mask To define the ip address wildcard mask pair and specify the covered range area id To define the OSPF area to which the interfaces in the covered range belong Default status the covered addresses is not specified Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 155 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Note After an OSPF process is created the process doesn t know which interface or network it should enter the command network can make the OSPF process know that This command can specify the interface to an area In the comma
309. word is not configured Note After the authentication mode is configured the corresponding authentication password needs to be configured and then it can take effect For example after configured the plain text authentication mode users need to configure the corresponding plain text password In general case the authentication mode and the authentication password are configured respectively In order to be compatible with the old version under the condition that the authentication mode is not configured when configuring a kind of authentication password the corresponding authentication mode is specified For example a user doesn t specify any authentication mode at the beginning and then he configures a key id and a password of MD5 at the first time the MD5 authentication mode is then configured by default Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 157 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 The command tp ospf hello interval This command configures the time interval for the interface sending HELLO packets the default value depends on the network type of the interface The default values of the broadcast network and the point to point network are 10 seconds the NBMA and point to point network are 30 seconds The no format of the command can be used to recover the HELLO interval time to the default value ip ospf ip address hello interval hello interval no ip ospf ip address hello interval Syntax Des
310. work Default status not configured Adopt the default value Note e On the PPP and HDLC protocol interfaces the network type of OSPF is point to point by default e On the frame relay X 25 and ATM protocol interfaces the network type of OSPF is non broadcast by default e On the Ethernet protocol interface the network type of OSPF is broadcast by default e When one interface is configured with multiple sub addresses the ospf attributes of each address can be specified via ip ospf Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 159 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 ip address e For other commands for configuring the interface please refer to 7 4 2 3 of The chapter Configure Basic Parameters of OSPF Area OSPF permits to configure the parameters of the area which comprise the authentication defining as the stub area specifying the cost of the default Summary route The authentication provides the protection for the password to prevent unauthorized users from accessing the area The stub area is an area that the external route information cannot be redistributed into ABR generates a default route to the stub area the router of the stub area gets to destination outside the autonomous system via the default route In order to reduce the amount of LSAs which are sent to the stub area the command area stub no summary can be configured on ABR This can prevent the type 3 LSA from being sent to the stub
311. work number To configure the network addresses covered by RIP The mask of the network address is obtained from the natural network segment and cannot be configured All direct interconnection networks matching the covered network address run RIP The address of the super net cannot be covered by the command interface To configure the interface name of the interface covered by RIP Default status no direct interconnection network and interface is covered Command mode RIP Protocol Configuration Mode Note A RIP notifying the routing information is based on the IP address of the interface But on a Maipu router the routing information can only be issued on the primary address the secondary address is only the source of the routing information in the direct interconnection networks covered by RIP B The direct route generated by the IP address configured via ip unnumber use the address of other interface is not notified to outside as the information about the direct interconnection network in RIP C When receiving RIP protocol packets the protocol checks whether the source address of a packet directly connects with the receiving interface that is to check if they are in a same sub net If it is a point to point interface when they are not in a same sub net the protocol even checks whether the source address matches the peer address In some link layers the local router cannot learn the point to point interface whose peer addre
312. y server optional Ensure that this domain name can be analyzed in DNS server configured Proxy server port The port of the remote proxy server The default value is 5060 Register server port The port of the remote register server The default value is 5060 It can use the same port with the proxy server Local port The local port used by the SIP protocol Retry invite times The times of retransmitting INVITE messages when the peer end is unreachable after initiating a call Start Register to SIP Server Tick check box to start register to SIP server The phone number registered by local gateway is registered to SIP server Click Current Status of Register to display register number of equipment in SIP server See details in the figure below Protocol Configuration gt Number register status of Sip Nnmber register status The local phone number Register status 0106000 No response 0286000 No response 404 No response 403 No response 402 No response 401 No response Retzesh J Back Maipu Confidential amp Proprietary Information Page 50 of 257 MP2000 104B AC User Manual Version 1 0 Click SIP local area config to enter the interface of configuring SIP local domain When using STUN traversing NAT the configuration needs to realize intranet communication SIP local area config SIP local area Subnet mask 255 255 252 0 Local area 128 255 16 0 Cietes J Ea The local domain matching rule I

Manual Maipu Router MP2000 Series - User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents